Fujitsu M10 4 Users Manual 4/Fujitsu 4S/SPARC 4/SPARC 4S Service
2015-01-29
: Fujitsu Fujitsu-M10-4-Users-Manual-219334 fujitsu-m10-4-users-manual-219334 fujitsu pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 520
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/ SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual Manual Code: C120-E682-06EN December 2013 Copyright © 2007, 2013, Fujitsu Limited. All rights reserved. Oracle and/or its affiliates provided technical input and review on portions of this material. Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited each own or control intellectual property rights relating to products and technology described in this document, and such products, technology and this document are protected by copyright laws, patents, and other intellectual property laws and international treaties. This document and the product and technology to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of such product or technology, or of this document, may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, and their applicable licensors, if any. The furnishings of this document to you does not give you any rights or licenses, express or implied, with respect to the product or technology to which it pertains, and this document does not contain or represent any commitment of any kind on the part of Oracle or Fujitsu Limited or any affiliate of either of them. This document and the product and technology described in this document may incorporate third-party intellectual property copyrighted by and/or licensed from the suppliers to Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, including software and font technology. Per the terms of the GPL or LGPL, a copy of the source code governed by the GPL or LGPL, as applicable, is available upon request by the End User. Please contact Oracle and/or its affiliates or Fujitsu Limited. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, SPARC64 logo and all SPARC trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other countries and used under license. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government. Disclaimer: The only warranties granted by Oracle and Fujitsu Limited, and/or any affiliate in connection with this document or any product or technology described herein are those expressly set forth in the license agreement pursuant to which the product or technology is provided. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN SUCH AGREEMENT, ORACLE OR FUJITSU LIMITED, AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIE S OF ANY KIND (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) REGARDING SUCH PRODUCT OR TECHNOLOGY OR THIS DOCUMENT, WHICH ARE ALL PROVIDED AS IS, AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Unless otherwise expressly set forth in such agreement, to the extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Oracle or Fujitsu Limited, and/or any of their affiliates have any liability to any third party under any legal theory for any loss of revenues or profits, loss of use or data, or business interruptions, or for any indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. Copyright © 2007, 2013, Fujitsu Limited. Tous droits réservés. Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ont fourni et vérifié des données techniques de certaines parties de ce composant. Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et Fujitsu Limited détiennent et contrôlent chacun des droits de propriété intellectuelle relatifs aux produits et technologies décrits dans ce document. De même, ces produits, technologies et ce document sont protégés par des lois sur le droit d’auteur, des brevets, et d'autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle et des traités internationaux. Ce document, le produit et les technologies afférents sont exclusivement distribués avec des licences qui en restreignent l'utilisation, la copie, la distribution et la décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit, de ces technologies ou de ce document ne peut être reproduite sous quelque forme que ce soit, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite préalable d'Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et de Fujitsu Limited, et de leurs éventuels concédants de licence. Ce document, bien qu'il vous ait été fourni, ne vous confère aucun droit et aucune licence, exprès ou tacites, concernant le produit ou la technologie auxquels il se rapporte. Par ailleurs, il ne contient ni ne représente aucun engagement, de quelque type que ce soit, de la part d'Oracle ou de Fujitsu Limited, ou des sociétés affiliées de l'une ou l'autre entité. Ce document, ainsi que les produits et technologies qu'il décrit, peuvent inclure des droits de propriété intellectuelle de parties tierces protégés par le droit d’auteur et/ou cédés sous licence par des fournisseurs à Oracle et/ou ses sociétés affiliées et Fujitsu Limited, y compris des logiciels et des technologies relatives aux polices de caractères. Conformément aux conditions de la licence GPL ou LGPL, une copie du code source régi par la licence GPL ou LGPL, selon le cas, est disponible sur demande par l'Utilisateur Final. Veuillez contacter Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ou Fujitsu Limited. Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des parties tierces. Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l'Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque déposée de The OpenGroup. Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés. Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques déposées de Fujitsu Limited. SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, le logo SPARC64 et toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc., aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l'accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l'utilise pour le compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s'applique : U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government. Avis de non-responsabilité : les seules garanties octroyées par Oracle et Fujitsu Limited et/ou toute société affiliée de l'une ou l'autre entité en rapport avec ce document ou tout produit ou toute technologie décrits dans les présentes correspondent aux garanties expressément stipulées dans le contrat de licence régissant le produit ou la technologie fournis. SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE EXPRESSEMENT STIPULEE AU DIT CONTRAT, ORACLE OU FUJITSU LIMITED ET/OU LES SOCIETES AFFILIEES A L'UNE OU L'AUTRE ENTITE DECLINENT TOUT ENGAGEMENT OU GARANTIE, QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA NATURE (EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE) CONCERNANT CE PRODUIT, CETTE TECHNOLOGIE OU CE DOCUMENT, LESQUELS SONT FOURNIS EN L'ETAT. EN OUTRE, TOUTES LES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON, SONT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE. Sauf mention contraire expressément stipulée dans ce contrat, dans la mesure autorisée par la loi applicable, en aucun cas Oracle ou Fujitsu Limited et/ou l'une ou l'autre de leurs sociétés affiliées ne sauraient être tenues responsables envers une quelconque partie tierce, sous quelque théorie juridique que ce soit, de tout manque à gagner ou de perte de profit, de problèmes d'utilisation ou de perte de données, ou d'interruptions d'activités, ou de tout dommage indirect, spécial, secondaire ou consécutif, même si ces entités ont été préalablement informées d'une telle éventualité. LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L'ETAT" ET TOUTE AUTRE CONDITION, DECLARATION ET GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, EST FORMELLEMENT EXCLUE, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI EN VIGUEUR, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON. Contents Preface xxi Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 1.1 Warning/Caution Indications 1.2 Warning Labels 1.3 Labels/Tags 1.4 Safety Precautions 1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity 1.6 Other Precautions 1.7 Emergency Power Off Chapter 2 1 1 2 2 5 6 7 8 Understanding the System Components 11 2.1 Identifying the Names and Locations of Components 2.2 Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel 2.3 2.4 2.2.1 Display function of the operation panel 19 2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel 20 Checking the LED Indications Operation panel LEDs 2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator) 2.3.3 LEDs on each component 23 Confirming the Types of Cable Types of cable 2.4.2 Cable connection ports 16 23 2.3.1 2.4.1 11 24 26 29 29 29 iii Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 3.1 Suspected Failure Conditions 3.2 Determining the Causes of Individual Failures 3.3 Identifying a Failure 34 3.3.2 Checking error messages 3.3.3 Checking the status of a component 3.3.4 Checking the status of a PCI expansion unit 3.3.5 Checking log information 3.3.6 Checking the messages output by the predictive self-repairing 35 35 35 37 38 39 Identifying the location of the chassis requiring maintenance Downloading Error Log Information Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 41 Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance 4.2 Confirming the System Configuration 41 41 4.2.1 Confirming the hardware configuration 4.2.2 Confirming the software and firmware configurations Understanding Types of Maintenance Chapter 5 42 42 44 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 53 5.1 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Command 5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition 5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance 5.4 Stopping the Entire System 5.5 56 Stopping the system with the XSCF command 63 5.4.2 Stopping the system from the operation panel 63 64 5.5.1 Lowering the cable support 5.5.2 Removing the power cord 65 5.5.3 Removing the front cover 67 Chapter 6 60 62 5.4.1 Accessing Components 40 40 4.1 4.3 33 Checking the LED indications 3.3.7 3.4 33 3.3.1 tool iv 33 64 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 69 53 6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command 69 6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition 6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance 6.4 Starting the Entire System 6.5 Starting the system with an XSCF command 75 6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel 75 Restoring the Chassis 76 6.5.1 Installing the power cord 76 6.5.2 Fixing the cable support 78 6.5.3 Installing the front cover 79 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 83 7.1 Configuration of the CPU Memory Units 83 7.2 Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit 85 7.4 7.5 73 74 6.4.1 Chapter 7 7.3 71 7.2.1 Types of maintenance 85 7.2.2 Maintenance flow 7.2.3 Precautions for replacement 7.2.4 Precautions for installation 7.2.5 Precautions for removal 86 87 87 88 Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit 7.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 7.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 7.3.3 System-stopped maintenance Removing a CPU Memory Unit 88 89 89 90 91 7.4.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit 7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower 96 7.4.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper 98 7.4.4 Removing a PCI Express cable Installing a CPU Memory Unit 92 105 124 7.5.1 Installing a PCI Express cable 124 7.5.2 Installing the CPU memory unit upper 136 Contents v 7.6 7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory unit lower 7.5.4 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 147 Active/Cold maintenance 7.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 7.6.3 System-stopped maintenance Maintaining the Memory Memory Configuration 8.2 Memory Configuration Rules 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 148 149 152 159 8.1 8.3 vi 146 7.6.1 Chapter 8 159 163 8.2.1 Memory mounting rules 8.2.2 Checking memory information 164 Before Maintaining Memory 168 8.3.1 Types of maintenance 168 8.3.2 Maintenance flow 8.3.3 Precautions for replacement 8.3.4 Precautions for installation 8.3.5 Precautions for removal 169 169 170 170 8.4.1 Active/Cold maintenance 8.4.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 8.4.3 System-stopped maintenance 170 171 172 173 8.5.1 Accessing memory 173 8.5.2 Removing memory 173 Installing Memory 167 169 Enabling the Removal of Memory Removing Memory 146 174 8.6.1 Installing memory 8.6.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 174 175 175 8.7.1 Active/Cold maintenance 175 8.7.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 8.7.3 System-stopped maintenance 176 178 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 179 9.1 Configuration of the Crossbar Units 179 9.2 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit 180 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.2.1 Types of maintenance 9.2.2 Maintenance flow 180 181 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit 9.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 9.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 9.3.3 System-stopped maintenance Removing a Crossbar Unit 182 182 183 184 9.4.1 Accessing a crossbar unit 184 9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit 184 Installing a Crossbar Unit 186 9.5.1 Installing a crossbar unit 9.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 187 187 187 9.6.1 Active/Cold maintenance 9.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 9.6.3 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 10 181 187 188 190 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 191 10.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Units 191 10.2 Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit 192 10.3 10.2.1 Types of maintenance 192 10.2.2 Maintenance flow 10.2.3 Precautions for replacement 193 193 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit 10.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 10.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance 195 10.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 196 10.3.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 10.3.5 System-stopped maintenance 194 194 197 198 Contents vii 10.4 10.5 10.6 Removing a Power Supply Unit 198 10.4.1 Accessing a power supply unit 199 10.4.2 Removing a power supply unit 199 Installing a Power Supply Unit 200 10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit 10.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 200 200 10.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 10.6.2 Active/Cold maintenance 201 10.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 202 10.6.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 10.6.5 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 11 201 Maintaining the Fan Units 202 Configuration of the Fan Units 205 11.2 Before Maintaining a Fan Unit 206 11.4 11.5 11.6 203 205 11.1 11.3 200 11.2.1 Types of maintenance 207 11.2.2 Maintenance flow 11.2.3 Precautions for replacement 207 207 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit 11.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 11.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance 209 11.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 209 11.3.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 11.3.5 System-stopped maintenance Removing a Fan Unit Accessing a fan unit 213 11.4.2 Removing a fan unit 213 211 211 214 11.5.1 Installing a fan unit 11.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 208 212 11.4.1 Installing a Fan Unit 208 214 214 214 viii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 11.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 11.6.2 Active/Cold maintenance 215 11.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 216 11.6.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 11.6.5 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 12 12.1 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 216 217 Maintaining the Internal Disks 219 Configuration of the Internal Disks 219 12.1.1 12.2 215 Identification of disk slot 220 Before Maintaining an Internal Disk 12.2.1 Types of maintenance 12.2.2 Maintenance flow 12.2.3 Precautions for installation 12.2.4 Precautions for removal 226 226 226 227 227 Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk 12.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 12.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance 229 12.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 230 12.3.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 12.3.5 System-stopped maintenance Removing an Internal Disk 228 230 231 231 12.4.1 Accessing an internal disk 232 12.4.2 Removing an internal disk 232 Installing an Internal Disk 233 12.5.1 Installing an internal disk 12.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 227 233 234 234 12.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 234 12.6.2 Active/Cold maintenance 235 12.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 236 12.6.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 12.6.5 System-stopped maintenance 236 237 Contents ix Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 13.1 Configuration of the PCI Express Cards 239 13.2 Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card 241 13.2.1 Types of maintenance 241 13.2.2 Maintenance flow 13.2.3 Precautions for replacement 13.2.4 Precautions for installation 13.2.5 Precautions for removal 241 242 242 242 13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used 13.4 Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.4.1 Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) 13.4.2 Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) 13.4.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 13.4.4 System-stopped maintenance Removing a PCI Express Card 243 246 246 250 252 252 253 13.5.1 Accessing a PCI Express card cassette 253 13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette 253 13.5.3 Removing a PCI Express card Installing a PCI Express Card 255 258 13.6.1 Installing a PCI Express card 13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette 13.6.3 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 258 260 260 260 13.7.1 Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) 13.7.2 Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) 13.7.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 13.7.4 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 14 261 262 262 263 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 265 14.1 Location of the PSU Backplane Unit 14.2 Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 14.2.1 x 239 Types of maintenance 265 266 267 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 14.2.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 Maintenance flow 267 Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit 14.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 14.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 14.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 268 269 269 Removing the PSU Backplane Unit 270 14.4.1 Accessing the PSU backplane unit 271 14.4.2 Removing the PSU backplane unit 273 Installing the PSU Backplane Unit 274 14.5.1 Installing the PSU backplane unit 14.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 276 Active/Cold maintenance 276 14.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 14.6.3 System-stopped maintenance 277 278 Maintaining the Operation Panel 281 15.1 Location of the Operation Panel 15.2 Before Maintaining the Operation Panel 15.3 15.4 15.5 274 275 14.6.1 Chapter 15 267 281 15.2.1 Types of maintenance 15.2.2 Maintenance flow 15.2.3 Precautions for replacement 282 282 283 283 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel 15.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 15.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 15.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 284 Removing the Operation Panel 285 285 286 15.4.1 Accessing the operation panel 287 15.4.2 Removing the operation panel 289 Installing the Operation Panel 283 290 15.5.1 Installing the operation panel 15.5.2 Restoring the chassis 290 291 Contents xi 15.6 Restoring the System 15.6.1 Active/Cold maintenance 15.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 15.6.3 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 16 292 293 294 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box 16.1 Configuration of the Crossbar Units 297 16.2 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit 298 16.3 16.2.1 Types of maintenance 16.2.2 Maintenance flow 298 299 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit 16.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 16.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 16.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 16.4 Removing a Crossbar Unit 16.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit 16.6 Restoring the System 300 301 301 303 304 Active/Cold maintenance 304 16.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 16.6.3 System-stopped maintenance 305 305 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box 17.1 Location of the XSCF Unit 17.2 Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit 17.3 299 299 16.6.1 Chapter 17 xii 292 307 17.2.1 Types of maintenance 17.2.2 Maintenance flow 308 308 309 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit 17.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 17.3.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 17.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 17.4 Removing the XSCF Unit 17.5 Installing the XSCF Unit 17.6 Restoring the System 309 310 310 311 312 314 315 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 307 297 17.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 17.6.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 17.6.3 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 18 315 315 316 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 18.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Units 317 18.2 Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit 318 18.3 18.2.1 Types of maintenance 18.2.2 Maintenance flow 18.2.3 Precautions for replacement 318 319 319 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit 18.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 18.3.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 18.3.3 System-stopped maintenance Removing a Power Supply Unit 18.5 Installing a Power Supply Unit 18.6 Restoring the System 320 323 324 18.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 324 18.6.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 18.6.3 System-stopped maintenance 324 325 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box Configuration of the Fan Units 327 19.2 Before Maintaining a Fan Unit 328 19.4 321 322 19.1 19.3 319 320 18.4 Chapter 19 19.2.1 Types of maintenance 19.2.2 Maintenance flow 19.2.3 Precautions for replacement 329 329 19.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 19.3.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 19.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 19.4.1 327 329 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit Removing a Fan Unit 317 329 330 330 331 332 Accessing a fan unit 332 Contents xiii 19.4.2 19.5 19.6 Removing a fan unit Installing a Fan Unit 333 19.5.1 Installing a fan unit 19.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System 332 333 333 333 19.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 19.6.2 Inactive/Hot maintenance 19.6.3 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 20 334 334 334 Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box 20.1 Location of the XSCF Interface Unit 20.2 Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit 20.2.1 Types of maintenance 20.2.2 Maintenance flow 337 338 338 339 20.3 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit 20.4 Removing the XSCF Interface Unit 20.5 Installing the XSCF Interface Unit 20.6 Restoring the System Chapter 21 339 340 342 342 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 343 21.1 Location of the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.2 Before Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.2.1 Types of maintenance 21.2.2 Maintenance flow 343 344 344 345 21.3 Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.4 Removing the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.5 Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.6 Restoring the System Chapter 22 337 346 353 354 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box 22.1 Configuration of the Fan Backplane 22.2 Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane 22.2.1 345 Types of maintenance 357 358 359 xiv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 357 22.2.2 Maintenance flow 359 22.3 Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane 22.4 Removing the Fan Backplane 22.5 22.6 360 22.4.1 Accessing the fan backplane 360 22.4.2 Removing the fan backplane 361 Installing the Fan Backplane 365 22.5.1 Installing the fan backplane 22.5.2 Restoring the chassis Restoring the System Chapter 23 365 366 366 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 23.1 Location of the Operation Panel 23.2 Before Maintaining the Operation Panel 23.2.1 Types of maintenance 23.2.2 Maintenance flow 23.2.3 Precautions for replacement 368 368 369 369 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel 23.4 Removing the Operation Panel 23.6 Accessing the operation panel 370 23.4.2 Removing the operation panel 373 Installing the Operation Panel 375 23.5.1 Installing the operation panel 23.5.2 Restoring the chassis Chapter 24 369 370 23.4.1 Restoring the System 367 367 23.3 23.5 359 376 377 378 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 379 24.1 Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 24.2 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) 24.3 24.2.1 Types of maintenance 24.2.2 Maintenance flow 24.2.3 Precautions for replacement 381 381 381 382 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) 24.3.1 379 Inactive/Cold maintenance 382 382 Contents xv 24.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 383 24.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) 24.5 Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) 24.6 Restoring the System 385 386 24.6.1 Inactive/Cold maintenance 24.6.2 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 25 384 386 387 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 389 25.1 Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 25.2 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Optical) 25.3 25.2.1 Types of maintenance 25.2.2 Maintenance flow 25.2.3 Precautions for replacement 392 392 392 392 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical) 25.3.1 Inactive/Cold maintenance 25.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 393 393 25.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) 25.5 Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) 25.6 Restoring the System 394 394 396 397 25.6.1 Inactive/Cold maintenance 25.6.2 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 26 397 398 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 401 26.1 Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables 26.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable 26.3 389 26.2.1 Types of maintenance 26.2.2 Maintenance flow 403 403 403 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable 26.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 404 26.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance 405 26.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 405 26.3.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 26.3.5 System-stopped maintenance 406 406 xvi Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 404 401 26.4 Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable 26.5 Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable 26.6 Restoring the System 409 410 26.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 26.6.2 Active/Cold maintenance 410 26.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 411 26.6.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 26.6.5 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 27 407 410 411 411 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 413 27.1 Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports 27.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 27.3 27.2.1 Types of maintenance 27.2.2 Maintenance flow 415 415 415 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 27.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 27.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance 417 27.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 417 27.3.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 27.3.5 System-stopped maintenance 418 418 Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 27.5 Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable 27.6 Restoring the System 419 421 421 27.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 27.6.2 Active/Cold maintenance 422 27.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 422 27.6.4 Inactive/Cold maintenance 27.6.5 System-stopped maintenance Chapter 28 421 423 423 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box Configuration of the Cable Kit 28.1.1 416 416 27.4 28.1 413 425 425 Cables for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board 425 Contents xvii 28.1.2 Cables for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane 28.1.3 28.2 427 Locations for the cable kit 428 Before Maintaining the Cable Kit 28.2.1 Types of maintenance 28.2.2 Maintenance flow 429 429 430 28.3 Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit 28.4 Removing the Cable Kit 28.4.1 430 431 Removing the cables for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board 28.4.2 Removing the cables for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane 28.5 Installing the Cable Kit 28.5.1 444 444 Installing a cable for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane 28.6 Restoring the System Chapter 29 436 Installing a cable between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board 28.5.2 431 445 451 Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection 453 29.1 Configuration of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.2 Before Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.3 29.2.1 Types of maintenance 29.2.2 Maintenance flow 29.2.3 Precautions for replacement 453 455 455 455 455 Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance 456 29.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 456 29.4 Removing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.5 Installing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.6 Restoring the System 457 461 461 xviii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 456 29.6.1 Active/Cold maintenance 29.6.2 System-stopped maintenance Appendix A Component List Appendix B Component Specifications B.1 CPU Memory Unit B.2 Crossbar Unit B.3 XSCF Unit B.4 Power Supply Unit B.5 Fan Unit B.6 Internal Disk Drive B.7 PCI Express Card B.8 XSCF Interface Unit B.9 Backplanes B.10 463 469 470 471 471 472 472 473 476 Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands iostat(1M) Command C.2 prtdiag(1M) Command 479 C.3 prtconf(1M) Command 482 C.4 netstat(1M) Command 485 C.5 ping(1M) Command C.6 ps(1) Command C.7 prstat(1M) Command D.1 486 488 489 491 491 Wire connection chart for serial cable D.2 USB Port 492 D.3 SAS Port 493 D.4 RESET Switch Index 477 477 External Interface Specifications Serial Port D.1.1 467 467 C.1 Appendix D 462 468 Operation Panel Appendix C 462 492 493 495 Contents xix xx Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 Preface This document describes the maintenance procedure for Oracle or Fujitsu SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. The maintenance work should be performed by service engineers and/or field engineers. Fujitsu M10 is sold as SPARC M10 Systems by Fujitsu in Japan. Fujitsu M10 and SPARC M10 Systems are identical products. The preface includes the following sections: ■ Audience ■ Related Documentation ■ Text Conventions ■ Notes on Safety ■ Syntax of the Command-Line Interface (CLI) ■ Document Feedback Audience This document is intended for service engineers and field engineers who perform maintenance work on the system. xxi Related Documentation All documents for your server are available online at the following locations. Sun Oracle software-related documents (Oracle Solaris, etc.) http://www.oracle.com/documentation/ ■ ■ Fujitsu documents Japanese site http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/ Global site http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/ The following table lists documents related to SPARC M10 Systems. Documentation Related to SPARC M10 Systems (*1) Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Getting Started Guide (*2) Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Quick Guide Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information (*2) Software License Conditions for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Security Guide Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems/SPARC Enterprise/PRIMEQUEST Common Installation Planning Manual Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide Fujitsu M10-1/SPARC M10-1 Service Manual Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual PCI Expansion Unit for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Service Manual Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems XSCF Reference Manual Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Product Notes Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Glossary *1 *2 The listed manuals are subject to change without notice. Printed manuals are provided with the product. xxii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 Text Conventions This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of information. Font/Symbol Meaning Example AaBbCc123 What you type, when contrasted with on-screen computer output. This font indicates an example of command input. XSCF> adduser jsmith AaBbCc123 The names of commands, files, and directories; on-screen computer output. This font indicates an example of command input in the frame. XSCF> showuser -P User Name: jsmith Privileges: useradm auditadm Italic Indicates the name of a reference manual. See the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide. "" Indicates the names of chapters, sections, items, buttons, or menus. See "Chapter 2 Network Connection." Command syntax in the text While the XSCF commands have a section number of (8) or (1), it is omitted from the text. The Oracle Solaris commands have a section number such as (1M) in the text. Each command has a section number in a command name to prompt users to refer to it. Notes on Safety Read the following documents thoroughly before using or handling any SPARC M10 Systems. ■ Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information ■ Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide Preface xxiii Syntax of the Command-Line Interface (CLI) The command syntax is as follows: A variable that requires the input of a value must be put in Italics. ■ ■ ■ An optional element must be enclosed in []. A group of options for an optional keyword must be enclosed in [] and delimited by |. Document Feedback If you have any comments or requests regarding this document, please take a moment to share it with us by indicating the manual code, manual title, and page, and stating your points specifically through the following websites: ■ Japanese site http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/ ■ Global site http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/ xxiv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013 Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work This chapter describes the safety precautions that must be observed before starting any maintenance work. Note the meanings of each of the following symbols and labels to ensure that the work is done correctly. ■ Warning/Caution Indications 1.1 ■ Warning Labels ■ Labels/Tags ■ Safety Precautions ■ Notes Regarding Static Electricity ■ Other Precautions ■ Emergency Power Off Warning/Caution Indications This manual uses the following conventions to indicate warning and alert messages, which are intended to prevent injury to the user and others as well as damage to property. Warning - "WARNING" indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or serious personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. Caution - "CAUTION" indicates a potential hazard that could result in minor or moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. This also indicates that damage to the unit or other property may occur if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. 1 1.2 Warning Labels Observe the warning labels (A in the figure) affixed on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box during the maintenance work. The warning label on the crossbar box also describes certification standards. Caution - Never peel off the labels. Figure 1-1 Location of warning labels (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) A A A Figure 1-2 Location of warning labels (crossbar box) A 1.3 Labels/Tags This section explains labels and tags that are affixed on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. Note - The contents of the labels and tags may differ from those that are actually affixed. 2 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 ■ ■ The system name plate label (A in the figure) describes the model number, serial number, and version required for maintenance and management. The standard label (B in the figure) describes the following certification standards. The warning label on the crossbar box describes certification standards. SPARC M10-4/M10-4S ■ Safety: NRTL/C ■ Radio wave: VCCI-A, FCC-A, DOC-A, KCC, and C-Tick ■ Safety and radio wave: CE, BSMI, and GOST-R Crossbar box ■ Safety: NRTL/C ■ Radio wave: VCCI-A, FCC-A, DOC-A, KCC, and C-Tick ■ Safety and radio wave: CE and CU Figure 1-3 Location of the system name plate label and standard label (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) B A Figure 1-4 Location of the system name plate label and warning label (crossbar box) A B Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 3 ■ The RFID tag carries an Asset ID. The RFID tag of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is affixed on the front cover. Figure 1-5 4 RFID tag (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 1-6 1.4 RFID tag (crossbar box) Safety Precautions Observe the following precautions to protect yourself when performing maintenance. ■ Observe all the precautions, warnings, and instructions described on the chassis. ■ ■ Do not insert foreign objects into the openings in the chassis. Any such foreign object could come into contact with high-voltage circuitry or could short circuit the components, causing a fire or an electric shock. Contact a service engineer to inspect the chassis. Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 5 Safety precautions on electricity ■ ■ ■ ■ Confirm that the voltage and frequency of your input power supply match those shown on the electric rating label affixed on the chassis. Wear a wrist strap when handling a hard disk drive, CPU memory unit, or other printed boards. Use grounded power outlets. Do not attempt to make any mechanical or electrical modifications. Fujitsu shall not be responsible for the regulatory compliance of a chassis that has been modified. Safety precautions on the racks ■ ■ ■ ■ The racks should be fixed on the floor, ceiling, or the adjacent frame. The racks may be supplied with a quakeresistant options kit. The use of the quakeresistant options kit prevents the racks from falling over during installation or maintenance service on the chassis. Prior to installation or maintenance, a safety assessment should be conducted by a service engineer in the following cases: ■ When the quakeresistant options kit is not supplied and the rack is not fixed on the floor with bolts: Check for the safety such as whether the rack should not fall over. If multiple chassis are mounted in a rack, perform maintenance for each of the chassis. For details of the racks, see "Chapter 2 Planning and Preparing for System Installation" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide. 1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity Observe the precautions concerning the electrostatic discharge (ESD) as described in Table 1-1 to ensure the safety of personnel and the system. Table 1-1 6 ESD precautions Item Precaution Wrist strap Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed boards. ESD mat An approved ESD mat provides protection from static damage when used with a wrist strap. The mat also acts as a cushion to protect the small parts that are attached to printed boards. Antistatic bag/ ESD safe packaging box After removing a printed board or component, place it in the antistatic bag or ESD safe packaging box. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 How to use a wrist strap Wear a wrist strap in such a way that the inner metal surface (A in the figure) of the wrist strap band is in contact with your skin. Connect the clip (B in the figure) directly to the chassis. Caution - Do not connect the wrist strap clip to the ESD mat. By connecting the wrist strap clip to the chassis, the operator and components have the same level of potential, thus eliminating the danger of static damage. Figure 1-7 Wrist strap connection destination A B 1.6 Other Precautions ■ ■ Printed boards in the chassis can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage to printed boards, wear a wrist strap and ground it to the chassis prior to starting maintenance. When mounting any component in the chassis, check the connectors on both of the chassis and component beforehand to confirm that none of the pins are bent and that all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a component is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or component may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 7 ■ If excessive force is applied to the CPU memory unit, the components mounted on printed boards may be damaged. When handling the CPU memory unit, observe the following precautions: ■ Hold the CPU memory unit by the metal frame. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1.7 When removing the CPU memory unit from the packaging, keep the CPU memory unit horizontal until you lay it on the cushioned ESD mat. Connectors and components on the CPU memory unit have thin pins that bend easily. Therefore, do not place the CPU memory unit on a hard surface. Be careful not to damage the small parts located on both sides of the CPU memory unit. The heat sinks can be damaged by incorrect handling. Do not touch the heat sinks with your hands or other objects while replacing or removing CPU memory units. If a heat sink is disconnected or broken, obtain a replacement CPU memory unit. When storing or carrying a CPU memory unit, ensure that the heat sinks are sufficiently protected. When removing a cable such as the LAN cable, if you cannot reach the latch lock of the connector, use a flat headed screwdriver etc. to push the latch and release the cable. If you use force to remove the cable, the LAN port of the CPU memory unit or the PCI Express (PCIe) cards may be damaged. Do not use any power cord other than the specified one. Emergency Power Off This section explains the procedure for powering off the system in an emergency. Caution - In an emergency (such as smoke or flames coming from the chassis), immediately stop using the unit and turn off the power supply. Regardless of the operation you are performing, give top priority to fire prevention. 1. 8 Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 1-8 Removing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Figure 1-9 Removing the power cord (crossbar box) Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work 9 10 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components This chapter describes the components mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. It is necessary to confirm and fully understand the configurations of the components mounted in the chassis as well as the LED indications before starting any maintenance work. ■ Identifying the Names and Locations of Components ■ Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel ■ Checking the LED Indications ■ Confirming the Types of Cable For the specifications of each component, see "Appendix B Component Specifications." 2.1 Identifying the Names and Locations of Components This section describes the names and locations of the components mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. Components that can be accessed from the front You can access the fan unit and power supply unit only after removing the front cover. 11 Figure 2-1 Locations of components that can be accessed from the front (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (1) (3) (2) Location number Component 1 Fan unit 2 Internal disk 3 Power supply unit Figure 2-2 Location of a component that can be accessed from the front (crossbar box) (1) 12 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Location number Component 1 Fan unit Components that can be accessed from the rear Figure 2-3 Locations of components that can be accessed from the rear (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (1) (2) Location number Component 1 PCI-Express (PCIe) card cassette 2 Crossbar unit (Only for the SPARC M10-4S. The SPARC M10-4 incorporates three PCIe card cassettes.) Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 13 Figure 2-4 Locations of components that can be accessed from the rear (crossbar box) (2) (1) (3) (4) Location number Component 1 Power supply unit 2 XSCF unit 3 XSCF interface unit 4 Crossbar unit Internal components To access the internal components, remove the CPU memory unit from the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S, and the fan shelf from the crossbar box. 14 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 2-5 Locations of internal components (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (3) (1) (3) (2) (5) (4) (6) Location number Component 1 CPU memory unit upper 2 CPU memory unit lower 3 Memory 4 PSU backplane unit 5 HDD backplane 6 Operation panel Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 15 Figure 2-6 Locations of internal components (crossbar box) (1) (2) (3) 2.2 Location number Component 1 Fan backplane 2 Crossbar backplane unit 3 Operation panel Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel This section describes the functions of the operation panels of the SPARC M10-4/ M10-4S and the crossbar box. 16 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 The operation panel provides the system's display and control functions. A field engineer and the system administrator can specify the operation mode or control the starting/stopping of the system while checking the system operation status by referring to the LED indications. Figure 2-7 Location of the operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 17 Figure 2-8 Location of the operation panel (crossbar box) Figure 2-9 Appearance of operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) 㩿㪈㪀 㩿㪉㪀 㩿㪊㪀 㩿㪋㪀 18 㩿㪌㪀 Location number Component 1 POWER LED 2 XSCF STANDBY LED 㩿㪍㪀 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Location number Component 3 CHECK LED 4 ID switch (SPARC M10-4S and crossbar box only) 5 Mode switch 6 Power switch For a building block configuration, an operation panel is mounted in each chassis of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. However, the only operation panel on which all of the LEDs and switches are enabled is that of the chassis housing the master XSCF. Table 2-1 shows the display and operation status of the operation panel. Table 2-1 Display and operation status of operation panel LEDs/switches on operation panel If the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box is acting as the master XSCF If the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box is acting as an XSCF other than the master XSCF POWER LED Enabled (Displays the start or stop status of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box) Enabled (Displays the start or stop status of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box) XSCF STANDBY LED Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the system) Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box) CHECK LED Enabled (Displays an abnormal status of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box) Enabled (Displays an abnormal status of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box) ID switch Enabled (Registration of ID number) Enabled (Registration of ID number) Mode switch (*) Enabled (Mode operation of the system) Disabled Power switch Enabled (Start/stop operation of the system) Disabled *: Set the same mode for the SPARC M10-4S systems and crossbar boxes with the master XSCF and XCCF in the standby state. If the settings are different, an asterisk (*) is displayed beside the components in the output of the showhardconf or showstatus command. 2.2.1 Display function of the operation panel The operation panel has three LED indicators to implement its display function. The LED indicators indicate the following. For details, see "2.3.1 Operation panel LEDs." ■ General system status ■ System error warning ■ System error location Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 19 Figure 2-10 LEDs on operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) 㩿㪈㪀 㩿㪉㪀 㩿㪊㪀 2.2.2 Location number Component 1 POWER LED 2 XSCF STANDBY LED 3 CHECK LED Control function of the operation panel The operation panel has the following switches to implement its control function: ID switch Identifies the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box. ■ ■ ■ Mode switch (slide switch) Specifies the operation mode. Power switch Controls start/stop of the system. Figure 2-11 㩿㪈㪀 20 Operation panel switches 㩿㪉㪀 㩿㪊㪀 Location number Component 1 ID switch (SPARC M10-4S and crossbar box only) 2 Mode switch Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Location number Component 3 Power switch Use the ID switch to set the ID number of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Set #0 to #15 for the SPARC M10-4S and #80 to #83 for the crossbar box. Table 2-2 describes how to operate the ID switch. Table 2-2 How to operate the ID switch Operation Description Pressing the + side. The ID number increases by 1. Pressing the - side The ID number decreases by 1. Use the mode switch to set the operation mode for the system. The Locked and Service operation modes can be switched by sliding the mode switch. Table 2-3 describes the difference between the modes. Table 2-3 Icon Functions of the mode switch Name Description Locked mode This mode is used for normal operation. - The power switch can be used to start the system but not to stop it. Service mode This mode is used for maintenance. - The power switch cannot be used to start the system but can be used to stop it. - Place the system in Service mode to perform maintenance work with the system stopped. Use the power switch to start or stop the system. The system starts/stops differently depending on how the power switch is pressed. Table 2-4 describes how system start/stop varies depending on how the power switch is pressed. Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 21 Table 2-4 Icon Functions of the power switch Operation Description Brief press (For 1 second or more and less than 4 seconds) If the system has been started in Service mode (*): Operation is ignored. If the system is stopped in Service mode: Operation is ignored. If the system has been started in Locked mode (*): Operation is ignored. If the system is stopped in Locked mode: Starts the system. At this time, if a wait time for the air conditioning facilities or a warm-up time is set on the XSCF, the processing for waiting for the power-on of the air conditioning facilities and the completion of warm-up is omitted. If the system has been started in Service mode (*): Perform the system shutdown process to stop the system. If the system startup process is in progress in Service mode: Cancels the system startup process and then stops the system. If the system stop process is in progress in Service mode: Continues the system stop process. If the system is stopped in Service mode: Operation is ignored. Even a long press does not start the system. If the system is stopped in Locked mode: Starts the system. If a wait time for the air conditioning facilities or a warm-up time is set on the XSCF, the processing for waiting for the power-on of the air conditioning facilities and the completion of warm-up is omitted. If the system is not stopped in Locked mode: Operation is ignored. Long press (For 4 seconds or more) *: If the system has been started, it means that at least one physical partition has been powered on. Table 2-5 describes the functions of the mode switch. Table 2-5 Functions of the mode switch Function Starting/Stopping the system by the power switch 22 Mode switch Locked Service Only system startup is enabled. A long press shuts down the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 2-5 Functions of the mode switch (continued) Function Mode switch Inhibition of break signal reception 2.3 Locked Service Enabled. Using the setpparmode command, it is possible to specify whether break signal reception is allowed or inhibited for each physical partition. Disabled Checking the LED Indications This section describes the statuses of the LEDs mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M104S and the crossbar box. LEDs are mounted on the operation panel on the front of the chassis, on the rear panel of the chassis, and on each component that can be maintained. If an error occurs, the LED indication enables you to determine which system requires maintenance. 2.3.1 Operation panel LEDs The three LEDs on the operation panel indicate the operation status of the overall system. In addition, the LEDs enable you to check the system status by their combination of being on, blinking, or off. Table 2-6 lists the system operation status indicated by the LEDs, while Table 2-7 lists the system status indicated by the combination of LEDs. Table 2-6 System operation status indicated by LEDs Icon Name Color Description POWER Green Indicates the startup or stop status of the system for each chassis. ● On: System is started. ● Off: System is stopped. ● Blinking (*): System stop process is in progress. XSCF STANDBY Green Indicates the status of the XSCF for the entire system or for each chassis. ● On: XSCF is functioning normally. ● Off: XSCF is stopped. ● Blinking (*): System is being initialized after power-on. Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 23 Table 2-6 System operation status indicated by LEDs (continue d) Icon Name Color Description CHECK Amber Indicates the system operation status for each chassis. ● On: An error that prevents startup was detected. ● Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not being supplied. ● Blinking (*): Indicates that the chassis requires maintenance (this function is also referred to as the "locator"). * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). Table 2-7 System status indicated by combination of LEDs LED state Description POWER XSCF STANDBY CHECK Off Off Off Power is disconnected. Off Off On Power has just been turned on. Off Blinking (*) Off The XSCF is being initialized. Off Off On The XSCF has detected an error. Off On Off The XSCF is in the standby state. The system is waiting for power-on of the air conditioning facilities (in the data center). On On Off Warm-up standby processing is in progress. After the end of this processing, the system starts up. System startup processing is in progress. The system is operating. Blinking (*) On Off System stop processing is in progress. After the end of processing, the fan unit stops. * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). 2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator) The field engineer or system administrator can identify the chassis requiring maintenance by using the CHECK LED (A in the figure) on the rear panel. The CHECK LED on the rear panel is referred to as the system locator, and has the same function as the CHECK LED on the operation panel. 24 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 2-12 Location of system locator (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) A Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 25 Figure 2-13 Location of system locator (crossbar box) A Table 2-8 Icon Status of the system locator Name Color Description CHECK Amber Indicates the system operation status for each chassis. ● On: An error that prevents startup was detected. ● Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not being supplied. ● Blinking (*): Indicates that the chassis requires maintenance (this function is also referred to as the "locator"). * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). 2.3.3 LEDs on each component Each component of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box has an LED mounted. These LEDs light to indicate that a component requires maintenance if that component experiences a fault. Start maintenance work after checking the LED status. The LEDs on each component and their statuses are as follows: 26 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 2-9 LEDs on the XSCF or XSCF unit and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) Name Color Status Description READY Green On Indicates that the component is operating. The component cannot be released and removed from the system. Blinking (*) Indicates that the component is currently being mounted on the system or being disconnected from the system. Off Indicates that the component is disconnected from the system. Indicates that the component can be removed and replaced. On Indicates that an error has occurred. Blinking (*) Indicates that the component requires maintenance (This function is also referred to as the "locator"). Off Indicates the normal state. On Master chassis Off Slave chassis CHECK MASTER Table 2-10 Amber Green LEDs on the XSCF-LAN port and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) Name Color Status Description ACT Green On Indicates that communication is being performed. Off Indicates that communication is not being performed. Amber On Indicates that the communication speed is 1 Gbps. Green Blinking (*) Indicates that the communication speed is 100 Mbps. Off Indicates that the communication speed is 10 Mbps. LINK SPEED * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). Table 2-11 LED on the fan unit and its status (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) Name Color Status Description CHECK Amber On Indicates that an error has occurred. Blinking (*) Indicates that the component requires maintenance (This function is also referred to as the "locator"). Off Indicates the normal state. * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 27 Table 2-12 Name CHECK LED on the power supply unit and its status (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box) Color Status Description Green On Indicates that the input power is turned on and power is being supplied normally. Blinking (*) Indicates that the input power is being disconnected. On Indicates that an error has occurred. Indicates that the input power to this power supply unit is turned off in redundant operation. Blinking (*) Indicates a warning (An error has occurred but this power supply unit is operating). Off Indicates that power is not being supplied. Amber * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). Table 2-13 LEDs on the PCIe card slot and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Name Color Status Description POWER Green On Indicates that power is being supplied. Off Indicates that power is not being supplied. On Indicates that an error has occurred. Blinking (*) Indicates that the component requires maintenance (This function is also referred to as the "locator"). Off Indicates the normal state. ATTENTION Amber * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). Table 2-14 LEDs on the internal disk and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Name Color Status Description READY Green Blinking Indicates that the disk is being accessed. This LED is normally on, but it blinks while the disk is being accessed. While the LED is blinking, maintenance work such as the removal of the disk cannot be performed. Off Indicates that maintenance work such as the removal of the disk can be performed. On Indicates that an error has occurred. Blinking (*) Indicates that the component requires maintenance (This function is also referred to as the "locator"). Off Indicates the normal state. CHECK Amber * The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz). 28 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2.4 Confirming the Types of Cable This section describes the types of the cables that are connected to the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, as well as the locations of the cable ports. The types and number of the cables to be used vary depending on the configuration. 2.4.1 Types of cable In a building block configuration, the following cables are used for making a connection between the SPARC M10-4S systems and between the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box: ■ Crossbar cable (electrical) This is used to connect the SPARC M10-4S systems in a building block configuration without the crossbar box. ■ ■ Crossbar cable (optical) This is used to connect the SPARC M10-4S with the crossbar box in a building block configuration with the crossbar box. XSCF BB control cable This is used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box chassis. An XSCF mounted in a chassis becomes the master XSCF and monitors or controls the entire system. XSCFs other than the master XSCF act as slaves and monitor or control each chassis. ■ XSCF DUAL control cable This is used to connect the master XSCF to a standby XSCF and duplicate XSCF. One of the slave XSCFs functions as the standby XSCF. If an abnormality occurs with the master XSCF, the standby XSCF becomes the master XSCF and continues the monitoring or control of the system. Each table has a tag that is used for maintenance recording and management. 2.4.2 Cable connection ports Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 show the locations of the cable connection ports of the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. See the following chapters for the procedures for maintaining the cables: ■ Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) ■ Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) ■ Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables ■ Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 29 Figure 2-14 Locations of cable connection ports (SPARC M10-4S) (2) (1) (3) 30 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 2-15 Locations of cable connection ports (crossbar box) (1) (2) (3) Location number Connection port 1 XSCF DUAL control port 2 XSCF BB control port 3 Crossbar cable connection port Chapter 2 Understanding the System Components 31 32 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to determine and confirm the cause if an error occurs. ■ Suspected Failure Conditions 3.1 ■ Determining the Causes of Individual Failures ■ Identifying a Failure ■ Downloading Error Log Information Suspected Failure Conditions This section explains suspected failure conditions. Use the flow to determine the cause of a failure and identify the failure location in the following cases. For details on the flow for determining the cause of a failure, see "3.2 Determining the Causes of Individual Failures." ■ When the CHECK LED is on ■ ■ ■ 3.2 When an error message is displayed on the console When an error is displayed as a result of executing a command for checking the status When an error is displayed in the error log Determining the Causes of Individual Failures This section explains the flow for determining the causes of failures. This flow is also applied to failures of the PCI expansion unit. 33 Figure 3-1 Troubleshooting flow Start Is the LED on the power supply unit off? YES Check the connection of the power supply unit and power cords. NO Was e-mail sent by the XSCF mail function? YES NO Confirm that an error message is displayed on the OS and XSCF consoles. Execute showlogs on XSCF to display failure information. Check /var/adm/messages on Oracle Solaris. Write down the displayed failure information. Contact our service engineer. End 3.3 Identifying a Failure This section explains the method for identifying a failure. Use the flow described in "3.2 Determining the Causes of Individual Failures" to determine the appropriate way of checking for a failure. 34 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3.3.1 Checking the LED indications Check the LEDs on the operation panel, rear panel, and on each component to identify which component requires maintenance. Check the status of a component from its LED before starting any maintenance work on that component. ■ Operation panel LEDs You can check the status of the system by checking the LEDs on the operation panel. For details, see "2.3.1 Operation panel LEDs." ■ ■ LEDs on the rear panel You can check the status of the system by noting the CHECK LED on the rear panel of the chassis, which has the same function as the CHECK LED on the operation panel. For details, see "2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)." LED on each component You can determine the location of an error by checking the LED on the component that incorporates the failed hardware if an error occurs in the hardware within the chassis. For details, see "2.3.3 LEDs on each component." Note that some components such as memory are not provided with LEDs. To check the status of a component that does not have an LED, execute XSCF shell commands such as the showhardconf command from the maintenance terminal. For details, see "3.3.3 Checking the status of a component." 3.3.2 Checking error messages Display error messages to check the log information and obtain an error overview. You can use either of the following two methods to check the error messages: ■ Checking error log information using the XSCF shell For details, see "12.1 Checking a Log Saved by the XSCF" in the Fujitsu M10/ SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. ■ 3.3.3 Checking messages on Oracle Solaris For details, see "12.2 Checking Warning and Notification Messages" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. Checking the status of a component Execute the XSCF firmware commands to check the system hardware configuration and the status of each component. showhardconf command Execute the showhardconf command to check the information for a list of components. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showhardconf command to check the list of components. A failed component is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line. Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 35 XSCF> showhardconf SPARC M10-4S; + Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service; + System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On; Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running; BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:320 GB; ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci; + Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020; + Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000; + Model:; + Connection:7001; * PCIBOX#7001; Status:Faulted; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001; + FRU-Part-Number:; IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ; + FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG ; LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P ; + FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA ; PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet; + Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000; + Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e; + Model:; ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- showstatus command Execute the showstatus command to check the status of the components. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showstatus command to check the status. A failed component is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line. XSCF> showstatus MBU Status:Normal; * MEM#0A Status:Faulted; The status of the component is displayed following "Status:". Table 3-1 describes the status of the components. Table 3-1 36 Status of components Display Description Normal The unit is in the normal state. Faulted The unit is faulty and is not operating. Degraded A part of the unit has failed or degraded, but the unit is running. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 3-1 3.3.4 Status of components (continue d) Display Description Deconfigured Due to the failure or degradation of another unit, the target unit and components of its underlying layer has been degraded, though there is no problem in them. Maintenance Maintenance is being performed. The replacefru, addfru, or initbb command is being executed. Checking the status of a PCI expansion unit If a PCI expansion unit is connected, execute the ioxadm command from the XSCF shell to check the status of the PCI expansion unit. ioxadm command Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions (temperature, voltage, etc.) or LED indications for the PCI expansion unit. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions of the specified PCI expansion unit. To specify a PCI expansion unit, enter the serial number of the PCI expansion unit after determining it by executing the ioxadm list command. The following example shows the environmental conditions for the PCIBOX#2008 "2008" are the last four digits of the serial number of the PCI expansion unit. XSCF> ioxadm env -te PCIBOX#2008 Location Sensor PCIBOX#2008 AIRFLOW PCIBOX#2008 P_CONSUMPTION PCIBOX#2008/PSU#0 FAN PCIBOX#2008/PSU#1 FAN PCIBOX#2008/FAN#0 FAN PCIBOX#2008/FAN#1 FAN PCIBOX#2008/FAN#2 FAN PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_INTAKE PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO0 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO1 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT T_PART_NO2 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_12_0V PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO0 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO1 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO2 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_3_3_NO3 PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_1_8V PCIBOX#2008/IOBT V_0_9V Value Resolution Units 180.000 0.000 CHM 68.000 0.000 W 3936.000 0.000 RPM 3584.000 0.000 RPM 3374.000 0.000 RPM 3374.000 0.000 RPM 3374.000 0.000 RPM 26.000 0.000 C 31.500 0.000 C 30.750 0.000 C 31.500 0.000 C 12.069 0.000 V 3.293 0.000 V 3.295 0.000 V 3.291 0.000 V 3.300 0.000 V 1.804 0.000 V 0.900 0.000 V Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 37 3.3.5 Checking log information Execute the showlogs command to check the error log information. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showlogs command to check the log information. The log information is listed in the order of date, with the oldest appearing first. The following example shows that an Alarm status occurred in PSU#1 and PSU#2 at 12:45:31 on Oct 20, the Alarm status changed to a Warning status at 15:45:31 on the same day, and then the Alarm status further expanded to PSU#1, PSU#2, and PSU#3 at 17:45:31 on the same day. XSCF> showlogs error Date: Oct 20 12:45:31 JST 2012 Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344 Status: Alarm Occurred: Oct 20 12:45:31.000 JST 2012 FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2 Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Date: Oct 20 15:45:31 JST 2012 Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344 Status: Warning Occurred: Oct 20 15:45:31.000 JST 2012 FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2 Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Date: Oct 20 17:45:31 JST 2012 Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344 Status: Alarm Occurred: Oct 20 17:45:31.000 JST 2012 FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2, PSU#3,* Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1) Table 3-2 shows what log information each operand of the showlogs command can display. Table 3-2 38 Operands of the showlogs command and the log to be displayed Operand Description error Lists the error log. event Lists the event log. power Lists the power log. env Lists the temperature history. monitor Lists the monitoring message log. console Lists the console message log. ipl Lists the IPL message log. panic Lists the panic message log. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3.3.6 Checking the messages output by the predictive self-repairing tool Check the messages output from the Oracle Solaris Fault Manager predictive self-repairing tool, running on Oracle Solaris. Oracle Solaris Fault Manager has the following functions: ■ Receives telemetry information about errors. ■ Performs troubleshooting ■ Disables the components that have experienced errors. ■ Turns on the LED of a component that has experienced an error and displays the details in the system console message. Table 3-3 lists typical messages that are generated if an error occurs. These messages indicate that the fault has already been diagnosed. If there are corrective actions that can be taken by the system, they have already been taken. In addition, if the system is running, corrective actions continue to be applied. Messages are displayed on the console and are recorded in the /var/adm/messages file. Table 3-3 Predictive self-repairing messages Output Displayed Description Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 EVENT-TIME:Tue Nov 1 16:30:20 PST 2005 EVENT-TIME: Time stamp for the diagnosis Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 PLATFORM: ORCL,SPARC64-X, CSN:-,HOSTNAME:dt88-292 PLATFORM: Description of the chassis in which the error occurred Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 SOURCE:eft, REV:1.13 SOURCE: Information regarding the diagnosis engine used to identify the error Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 EVENT-ID: afc7e660-d609-4b2f-86b8-ae7c6b8d50c4 EVENT-ID: Universally unique event ID for this error Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 DESC: Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 A problem was detected in the PCI Express subsystem DESC: Basic description of the error Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 Refer to http://support. oracle.com/msg/SUN4-8000-0Y for more information. Website: Where to find specific information and countermeasures for this error Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 AUTO-RESPONSE: One or more device instances may be disabled. AUTO-RESPONSE: What the system has done (if anything) to alleviate any subsequent problems Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 IMPACT:Loss of services provided by the device instances associated with this fault. IMPACT: Description of the assumed impact of the failure Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 39 Table 3-3 3.3.7 Predictive self-repairing messages (continued) Output Displayed Description Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 REC-ACTION: Schedule a repair procedure to replace the affected device.Use Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 fmdump -v –u EVENT_ID to identify the device or contact Sun for support. REC-ACTION: Brief description of the corrective action the system administrator should apply Identifying the location of the chassis requiring maintenance Execute the setlocator command to identify the location of the chassis requiring maintenance by causing the CHECK LED on the operation panel and the CHECK LED (locator) on the rear panel to blink. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the setlocator command to blink the CHECK LED of the chassis requiring maintenance, and determine its location. The CHECK LEDs on the operation and rear panels blink. An execution example in which the chassis requiring maintenance is the master chassis is shown below. When specifying a different chassis such as BB#01, set "setlocator -b 1 blink." XSCF> setlocator -b 1 blink For details on where to find and how to check the CHECK LEDs, see "2.3 Checking the LED Indications." 3.4 Downloading Error Log Information This section describes the operation for downloading error log information. To download error log information, use the XSCF log fetch function. The XSCF unit has a maintenance USB port so that maintenance information such as error logs can be obtained easily. For details, see "12.1.15 Saving a log to a file with snapshot" and "12.1.16 Saving a log to a local USB device" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 40 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance This chapter describes the preparations that must be completed prior to performing any maintenance as well as the types of maintenance. ■ Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance 4.1 ■ Confirming the System Configuration ■ Understanding Types of Maintenance Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance This section explains tools required for maintenance. Table 4-1 lists the tools required for maintenance on a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). Table 4-1 4.2 Maintenance tools Item Use 1 Phillips screwdriver (No.2) Removing or replacing screws 2 Flathead screwdriver (small) Removing or replacing screws 3 Wrist strap For grounding static 4 ESD mat For grounding static Confirming the System Configuration This section explains how to check the hardware and software configurations. After completing any maintenance, it is necessary to confirm that the the system configuration is the same as that before starting the work. If an error occurs in the 41 system, record the system configuration and the states of the components before starting maintenance. Then, confirm that the system configuration is the same after maintenance as it was before. 4.2.1 Confirming the hardware configuration Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the configuration and status of the components mounted in the chassis. Before performing any maintenance work, check and record the hardware configuration of the chassis. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the hardware configuration information. XSCF> showhardconf The following information is displayed: Current configuration and status ■ 4.2.2 ■ Number of mounted Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ■ Status of the unit in which a physical partition error or degradation occurred ■ Information on the PCI expansion unit ■ Name properties of the PCI Express (PCIe) card Confirming the software and firmware configurations The software and firmware configurations and versions affect the operation of the system. To change the configuration or investigate a problem, check the latest state and check for any problems in the software. Confirming the software configuration Use Oracle Solaris commands to check the software configuration. If you are logged in to the XSCF console, switch to the control domain console by executing the console command beforehand. Table 4-2 lists the commands used for checking the software configuration. Table 4-2 42 Commands for checking the software configuration Command Description pkg(1) (Oracle Solaris 11) showrev(1M) (Oracle Solaris 10) Displays Oracle Solaris correction information and version. ldm(1M) Displays logical domain configuration information. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 1. Log in to the control domain console of the physical partition where the component to be maintained is mounted. For information on logging in to the control domain console, see "8.2 Switching to the Control Domain Console from the XSCF Shell" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 2. Execute the pkg(1) command to display Oracle Solaris correction information and version. - For Oracle Solaris 11, execute the pkg(1) command. # pkg info entire Name: entire Summary: entire incorporation including Support Repository Update (Oracle Solaris 11.1.12.5.0). - For Oracle Solaris 10, execute the showrev(1M) command. # showrev -p For the Oracle VM Server for SPARC version, execute the ldm(1M) command. # ldm -V Logical Domains Manager (v 3.1) Hypervisor control protocol v 1.9 Using Hypervisor MD v 1.3 Confirming the firmware configuration Use XSCF shell commands to check the firmware configuration. Table 4-3 lists the commands for checking the firmware configuration. Table 4-3 Commands for checking the firmware configuration Command Description version Displays the current firmware version information. showhardconf Displays information on components mounted in the chassis. showstatus Displays the status of a component. Of the FRUs comprising the system, this command displays information on a unit or component that is faulty or degraded. showboards Displays information on a physical system board (PSB). Displays information on a physical system board that belongs to the specified physical partition and information on all the physical system boards that are mounted. showpcl Displays the configuration information for a physical partition (hardware resource information). showfru Displays the setting information for a device. Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 43 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the version command to determine the firmware version information. In the following example, "-c xcp" is entered to determine the overall XCP version. XSCF> version -c xcp 4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance This section explains the types of maintenance. The single-chassis configuration and building block configuration denote the following system configurations. Table 4-4 System configuration Configuration Description Single-chassis configuration Configuration in which a single SPARC M10-4 is used Building block configuration Configuration in which 2 or more SPARC M10-4S's are combined and used There are the following five types of maintenance. Active/hot maintenance Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition remains turned on and the input power to the chassis in which the target Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is mounted is on (power cord is connected). Active/hot maintenance can be performed only on FRUs that have a redundant configuration or which support PCI hot plugging (PHP). ■ 44 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 4-1 Active/hot maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance) Physical partition (active) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX Hot Hot Hot BB#1 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Figure 4-2 Active/hot maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance) Physical partition (active) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX BB#1 Hot Physical partition (active) BB#3 Hot Hot ■ BB#3 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Active/cold maintenance Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the maintenance-target FRU belongs remains turned on but the input power to the chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power cord is disconnected). It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. For a single-chassis configuration, since the chassis cannot be disconnected with DR, active/cold maintenance cannot be performed. Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 45 Figure 4-3 Active/cold maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance) Physical partition (active) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX Cold BB#3 Hot Hot BB#1 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Figure 4-4 Active/cold maintenance (for dedicated power distribution unit maintenance) Physical partition (active) BB#0 Physical partition (active) PDU Hot BB#2 Hot Cold BB#1 Physical partition (active) Hot BB#3 PDU Hot XBBOX Hot Hot ■ 46 BB#4 Hot Inactive/hot maintenance Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the maintenance-target FRU belongs is powered off but the input power to the chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is on (power cord is connected). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 4-5 Inactive/hot maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX Hot Hot Hot BB#1 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Figure 4-6 Inactive/hot maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX BB#1 Hot Physical partition (active) BB#3 Hot Hot ■ BB#3 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Inactive/cold maintenance Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the maintenance-target FRU belongs is powered off and the input power to the chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power cord is disconnected). Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 47 Figure 4-7 Inactive/cold maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) BB#0 Physical partition (active) XBBOX Cold Hot Hot BB#1 Hot Physical partition (active) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot System-stopped maintenance Maintenance work is performed while all the physical partitions are powered off and input power to the chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power cord is disconnected). Figure 4-8 System-stopped maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) BB#0 Physical partition (stopped) XBBOX BB#1 Hot Physical partition (stopped) BB#3 Hot Cold 48 BB#4 Hot Physical partition (active) ■ BB#3 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (stopped) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 4-9 System-stopped maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) BB#0 Physical partition (stopped) XBBOX Hot BB#3 Hot Cold BB#1 Hot BB#4 Hot Physical partition (stopped) Physical partition (stopped) BB#2 BB#5 Hot Hot Figure 4-10 System-stopped maintenance (for dedicated power distribution unit maintenance) Physical partition (stopped) Physical partition (stopped) PDU BB#0 BB#2 Hot Hot Cold BB#1 Physical partition (stopped) Hot BB#3 PDU Hot XBBOX BB#4 Hot Hot Hot The following describes the types of maintenance for FRUs. Table 4-5 Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4 Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Reference CPU memory unit Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 7 Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 49 Table 4-5 Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4 (continued) Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Reference Memory Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 8 Power supply unit Supported Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Chapter 10 Fan unit Supported Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Chapter 11 Internal disk Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Chapter 12 PCIe card (*3) - - - - - Chapter 13 PSU backplane unit Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 14 Operation panel Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 15 *1: The inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. *2: Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration (RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance is supported. *3: The types of maintenance for PCIe cards are different from those of other FRUs. For details, see Table 13-1. Table 4-6 Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4S Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Reference CPU memory unit Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 7 Memory Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 8 Crossbar unit Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 9 Power supply unit Supported (*3) Supported (*2) Supported Supported Supported Chapter 10 Fan unit Supported Supported (*2) Supported Supported Supported Chapter 11 Internal disk Supported (*4) Supported (*2) Supported Supported Supported Chapter 12 PCIe card (*5) - - - - - Chapter 13 PSU backplane unit Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 14 50 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 4-6 Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4S (continued) Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Reference Operation panel Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 15 *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration. Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration (RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance is supported. The types of maintenance for PCIe cards are different from those of other FRUs. For details, see Table 13-1. Table 4-7 Types of maintenance for crossbar box Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Reference Crossbar unit Unsupported Supported (*1) Unsupported Supported Supported (*3) Chapter 16 XSCF unit Supported (*4) Unsupported (*2) Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 17 Power supply unit Supported (*5) Unsupported (*2) Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 18 Fan unit Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 19 XSCF interface unit Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 20 Crossbar backplane unit Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 21 Fan backplane Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 22 Operation panel Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 23 *1: If any physical partition mounted on two or more chassis is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. *3: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. *4: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby XSCF. *5: Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration. Table 4-8 Types of maintenance for cables and dedicated power distribution unit Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Reference Crossbar cable (electrical) Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 24 Crossbar cable (optical) Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Chapter 25 Chapter 4 Preparing for Maintenance 51 Table 4-8 Types of maintenance for cables and dedicated power distribution unit (continued) Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed FRU Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Reference XSCF BB control cable Supported (*1) Supported Supported Supported Supported Chapter 26 XSCF DUAL control cable Supported (*1) Supported Supported Supported Supported Chapter 27 Cable kit Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Unsupported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) Chapter 28 Dedicated power distribution unit Unsupported Supported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Chapter 29 *1: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby XSCF. *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. *3: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 52 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance This chapter describes the preparations that must be completed before you physically remove a component. See this chapter, as required, when performing the maintenance work on each component described in Chapter 7 onwards. ■ Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Command ■ Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition ■ Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance ■ Stopping the Entire System ■ Accessing Components Caution - Do not operate a target Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) while OpenBoot PROM is running (the ok prompt is displayed). After powering off the physical partition or starting Oracle Solaris, operate the target FRU. 5.1 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Command This section describes the procedure for releasing an FRU requiring maintenance from the system. The following FRUs can be the target of maintenance: ■ Power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box ■ Fan units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box ■ XSCF unit of the crossbar box ■ SPARC M10-4/M10-4S chassis itself and crossbar box chassis itself 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the replacefru command to display the maintenance menu. 53 XSCF> replacefru 3. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key. When the system is configured without a crossbar box, the following screen is not displayed. Proceed to step 4. In the following example, since the SPARC M10-4S chassis itself is selected, "1" is entered. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Please select a type of model which has FRU to be replaced. 1. BB (4s Building Block Model) 2. XBBOX (XB-BOX Model) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1,2|c:cancel] :1 4. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key. In the following example, since BB#0 is showing "Degraded" indicating abnormality, "1" is entered. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Please select the chassis including replaced FRU. No. FRU Status --- ------------------- -------------1 /BB#0 Degraded 2 /BB#1 Normal 3 /BB#2 Unmount 4 /BB#3 Unmount 5 /BB#4 Unmount 6 /BB#5 Unmount 7 /BB#6 Unmount 8 /BB#7 Unmount 9 /BB#8 Unmount 10 /BB#9 Unmount 11 /BB#10 Unmount 12 /BB#11 Unmount -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1-12|c:cancel] :1 5. Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key. In the following example, since the SPARC M10-4S chassis itself is faulty, "1" is entered. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Please select the BB or a type of FRU to be replaced. 54 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 1. BB itself 2. FAN (Fan Unit) 3. PSU (Power Supply Unit) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1-3|c:cancel] :1 6. Select the faulty FRU by specifying it with a numeric key. Since it was confirmed in step 4 that BB#0 is faulty, "1" is also entered here. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Please select a FRU to be replaced. No. FRU Status --- ------------------- -------------1 /BB#0 Degraded -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1|b:back] :1 7. After confirming that the selected FRU is displayed, enter "r". You are about to replace BB#0. Do you want to continue?[r:replace|c:cancel] :r 8. Confirm that the CHECK LED of the FRU is on or blinking. To release a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box chassis itself, confirm that the system locator on the chassis is blinking. For details on the locations of LEDs, see "2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)" and "2.3.3 LEDs on each component." Please execute the following steps: 1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit. 2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0. 3) Remove BB#0. 4) Execute either the following: 4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system, turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'. 4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device, please select 'cancel'. [f:finish|c:cancel] : You can now start FRU maintenance. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 55 5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition This section describes the procedure for releasing a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition by using dynamic reconfiguration (DR). DR can be used only for a building block configuration. Note - When there is no free space on a physical partition or when all the resources are assigned to the control domain, DR cannot be applied to the physical partition. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. When the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis, execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby XSCF. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". When the chassis requiring maintenance is a slave XSCF, proceed to step 4. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states. Continue? [y|n] :y 3. Log in to the XSCF again. 4. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm the operating condition of the physical partition. In the following example, [Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Running", which indicates that the physical partition is operating. XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0 PPAR-ID PPAR Status 00 Running 5. Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition of the logical domain. In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris running", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is operating. XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0 Logical Domain Name Status primary Solaris guest0 Solaris guest1 Solaris domain01 Solaris 56 running running running running Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 6. Connect to the control domain console of the physical partition. 7. Execute the ldm list-domain command to confirm the operating condition of the logical domain. In the following example, the [STATE] of the control domain and three guest domains displays "active", which indicates that the logical domain is operating. # ldm list-domain NAME primary guest0 guest1 domain01 8. STATE active active active active FLAGS -n-cv-n----n----n---- CONS UART 5000 5001 5002 VCPU 14 16 16 16 MEMORY 8G 8G 8G 8G UTIL 64% 42% 11% 7.3% UPTIME 2h 54m 2h 54m 2h 54m 2h 54m Execute the ldm list-devices -a command to check the usage status of the resource. The following example shows the resources that are bound to a logical domain and the resources that are not bound to a logical domain. # ldm list-devices -a CORE ID %FREE CPUSET 0 0 (0, 1) 4 0 (8, 9) 8 0 (16, 17) ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------184 0 (368, 369) 188 100 (376, 377) 512 100 (1024, 1025) 516 100 (1032, 1033) 520 100 (1040, 1041) 524 100 (1048, 1049) ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VCPU PID %FREE PM 0 0 no 1 0 no 8 0 no 9 0 no ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------369 0 no 376 100 --377 100 --1024 100 --1025 100 --1032 100 --1033 100 --------------------------Ommitted----------------------- 9. Execute the ldm list-io command to check the usage status of the I/O device. In the following example, values displayed under [TYPE] are all "BUS" for PCIE0 to PCIE11 under [NAME], which indicates that they are PCIe root complexes. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 57 Values displayed under [DOMAIN] are "primary" or "domain01", which indicates that they are assigned to the control domain or domain01. # ldm list-io NAME ---PCIE0 PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE11 /BB0/CMUL/NET0 /BB0/CMUL/SASHBA /BB0/PCI0 /BB0/PCI3 /BB0/PCI4 /BB0/PCI7 /BB0/PCI8 /BB1/CMUL/NET0 /BB1/CMUL/SASHBA /BB1/PCI0 /BB1/PCI3 /BB1/PCI4 /BB1/PCI7 /BB1/PCI8 TYPE ---BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE BUS --PCIE0 PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE11 PCIE0 PCIE0 PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE10 PCIE11 PCIE11 DOMAIN -----primary primary primary primary domain01 domain01 domain01 domain01 primary primary primary primary primary primary primary domain01 domain01 domain01 domain01 domain01 domain01 domain01 STATUS -----IOV IOV IOV IOV IOV IOV IOV IOV OCC OCC EMP EMP EMP EMP EMP OCC OCC EMP EMP EMP EMP EMP 10. Delete all the I/O devices from the domain to which the I/O devices of the system board to be deleted are assigned. In the following example, domain01 is stopped and the PCIe root complexes that are owned by domain01 and related to the system board to be deleted are released. # # # # # ldm ldm ldm ldm ldm stop domain01 rm-io PCIE8 domain01 rm-io PCIE9 domain01 rm-io PCIE10 domain01 rm-io PCIE11 domain01 11. Execute the ldm list-io command again to check the usage status of the I/O devices. The following example shows that the values displayed under [DOMAIN] for PCIE8, PCIE9, PCIE10, and PCIE11, which were used by domain01, are deleted and the I/O devices are released. # ldm list-io NAME ---PCIE0 58 TYPE ---BUS BUS --PCIE0 DOMAIN -----primary Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 STATUS -----IOV PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE11 /BB0/CMUL/NET0 /BB0/CMUL/SASHBA /BB0/PCI0 /BB0/PCI3 /BB0/PCI4 /BB0/PCI7 /BB0/PCI8 /BB1/CMUL/NET0 /BB1/CMUL/SASHBA /BB1/PCI0 /BB1/PCI3 /BB1/PCI4 /BB1/PCI7 /BB1/PCI8 BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE11 PCIE0 PCIE0 PCIE1 PCIE2 PCIE2 PCIE3 PCIE3 PCIE8 PCIE8 PCIE9 PCIE10 PCIE10 PCIE11 PCIE11 primary primary primary IOV IOV IOV primary primary primary primary primary primary primary OCC OCC EMP EMP EMP EMP EMP 12. Execute the showboards command to check the state of the chassis requiring maintenance. The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number. In the following example, [Fault] of PSB 01-0 displays "Degraded", which indicates that the system board is operating but has some faulty parts. XSCF> showboards -a PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment ---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00) Assigned 01-0 00(01) Assigned 02-0 00(02) Assigned 03-0 00(03) Assigned Pwr ---y y y n Conn ---y y y n Conf ---y y y n Test ------Passed Passed Passed Passed Fault -------Normal Degraded Normal Faulted 13. Execute the deleteboard command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. In the following example, PSB 01-0 is released from the physical partition. XSCF> deleteboard -c disconnect 01-0 14. Execute the showboards command to confirm that the chassis requiring maintenance has been released from the physical partition. In the following example, all of [Pwr], [Conn], and [Conf] of PSB 01-0 display "n", which indicates that PSB 01-0 has been released. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 59 XSCF> showboards -a PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment ---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00) Assigned 01-0 00(01) Assigned 02-0 00(02) Assigned 03-0 00(03) Assigned 5.3 Pwr ---y n y n Conn ---y n y n Conf ---y n y n Test ------Passed Passed Passed Passed Fault -------Normal Degraded Normal Faulted Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance This section describes the procedure for powering off the physical partition requiring maintenance. This is applicable if the system has a building block configuration and has multiple physical partitions. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. When the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis, execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby XSCF. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". When the chassis requiring maintenance is a slave XSCF, proceed to step 4. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states. Continue? [y|n] :y 3. Log in to the master XSCF again. 4. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm the operating condition of the physical partition. In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Running", which indicates that the physical partition is operating. XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0 PPAR-ID PPAR Status 00 Running 5. 60 Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition of the logical domain. In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris running", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is operating. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0 Logical Domain Name Status primary Solaris 4S-159-D0-G0 Solaris 4S-159-D0-G1 Solaris 4S-159-D0-G2 Solaris 6. running running running running Execute the showboards command to check the state of the chassis requiring maintenance. The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number. In the following example, we can see that [PPAR-ID] of PSB 01-0 is "00". XSCF> showboards -a PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment ---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00) Assigned 01-0 00(01) Assigned 7. Pwr ---y y Conn ---y y Conf ---y y Test ------Passed Passed Fault -------Normal Normal Execute the poweroff command to stop all the logical domains on the physical partition requiring maintenance. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". XSCF> poweroff -p 0 PPAR-IDs to power off:00 Continue? [y|n] :y 00 : Powering off 8. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the physical partition is turned off. In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Powered Off", which indicates that the power to the physical partition has been turned off. XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0 PPAR-ID PPAR Status 00 Powered Off 9. Switch the mode switches for the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Service mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Service mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Service mode. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 61 5.4 Stopping the Entire System This section describes the procedure for stopping the entire system. To undertake system-stopped maintenance, power off all the physical partitions to stop the entire system before physically removing any components. There are two ways of stopping the system, as follows: ■ Stopping the system with the XSCF command ■ Stopping the system from the operation panel Note - Before stopping the system, inform the users that the system will be stopped. Note - When a physical partition is stopped by operating the XSCF command or the operation panel, all the logical domains on the physical partition are stopped. Stop applications as required. 1. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4.1 Stopping the system with the XSCF command" or "5.4.2 Stopping the system from the operation panel." 2. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the physical partition is turned off. In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-IDs 00, 01, and 02 display "Powered Off", which indicates that the power to all the physical partitions has been turned off. XSCF> showpparstatus -a PPAR-ID PPAR Status 00 Powered Off 01 Powered Off 02 Powered Off 3. Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition of the logical domain. In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris powering down", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is shutting down. XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0 Logical Domain Name Status primary Solaris 4S-159-D0-G0 Solaris 4S-159-D0-G1 Solaris 4S-159-D0-G2 Solaris 62 powering powering powering powering down down down down Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 5.4.1 Stopping the system with the XSCF command 1. Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Service mode. For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel." Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the poweroff command. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". In the following example, the status of PPAR-IDs 00 and 01 displays "Powering off", which indicates that the power to the physical partitions is being turned off. XSCF> poweroff -a PPAR-IDs to power off:00,01 Continue? [y|n] :y 00 : Powering off 01 : Powering off The following processes are performed. - Oracle Solaris is completely shut down. - The system stops and enters the POWERON READY state (The XSCF is running). For details, see "6.2.2 Stopping the whole system" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 4. Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off. Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that make up the system. 5.4.2 Stopping the system from the operation panel 1. Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Service mode. For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel." Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state. 2. Press the power switch on the operation panel for 4 seconds or more. For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel." Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 63 Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The power switches of the other chassis are disabled. 3. Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off. Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that make up the system. 5.5 Accessing Components This section describes the operations that must be completed prior to accessing a component requiring maintenance. 5.5.1 Lowering the cable support For a component that is accessed from the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S, the cable support must be lowered and then the cables removed. 1. Loosen the right and left screws fixing the cable support, and unlock it by pulling the upper and lower metal fittings towards you (in the direction of the arrow). 64 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 5-1 2. 5.5.2 Locations of screws holding the cable support Lower the cable support. Removing the power cord When removing the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box to perform maintenance work on a component, do so only after removing the cable clamp from the power cord. 1. Release the latch (A in the figure) of the cable clamp. Pulling the cable clamp toward the rear of the chassis facilitates release of the latch. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 65 Figure 5-2 Releasing the cable clamp (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) A Figure 5-3 Releasing the cable clamp (crossbar box) A 2. 66 Remove the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S from the PSU backplane unit, or remove the power cord of the crossbar box from the power supply unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 5.5.3 Figure 5-4 Removing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Figure 5-5 Removing the power cord (crossbar box) Removing the front cover When performing maintenance on a component from the front of a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box chassis, remove the front cover before starting the work. 1. Release the right and left slide locks of the front cover and pull it towards the front. Chapter 5 Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance 67 Figure 5-6 Releasing the slide locks of the front cover (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Figure 5-7 Releasing the slide locks of the front cover (crossbar box) 2. 68 Lift the front cover upwards to remove it. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System This chapter describes the procedures required to restore the system after component maintenance. See this chapter, as required, when performing maintenance on each component described in Chapter 7 onwards. ■ Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command 6.1 ■ Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition ■ Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance ■ Starting the Entire System ■ Restoring the Chassis Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command This section describes the procedure for incorporating a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) into the system after maintenance. To do this, resume the replacefru command, which is running, to incorporate the FRU into the system. 1. After completing maintenance of the target FRU, return to the operation of the replacefru command of the XSCF firmware, and enter "f". Please execute the following steps: 1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit. 2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0. 3) Remove BB#0. 4) Execute either the following: 4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system, turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'. 4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device, please select 'cancel'. [f:finish|c:cancel] :f The following is displayed. Wait until the processing is complete. 69 Waiting for BB#0 to enter install state. [This operation may take up to 20 minute(s)] (progress scale reported in seconds) 0..... 30.. done Waiting for BB#0 to enter ready state. [This operation may take up to 45 minute(s)] (progress scale reported in seconds) 0..... 30..... 60..... done 2. After confirming that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "s". Do you want to start to diagnose BB#0?[s:start|c:cancel] :s 3. After confirming again that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "y". Diagnostic tests for BB#0 have started. Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y The following is displayed. Wait until the processing is complete. SB#00-0 power on sequence started. 0..... 30..... 60....end Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240.....| 270.....300.....330.....360..end Initial diagnosis has completed. SB power off sequence started. [1200sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120....end SB powered off. PSB Test Fault ---- ------- -------00-0 Passed Normal done 4. Confirm that the status is normal ("Normal") after diagnosis, and then enter "f". -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Status of the replaced FRU. FRU Status ------------------- -------------/BB#0 Normal -----------------------------------------------------------------------------The replacement of BB#0 has completed normally.[f:finish] :f 5. 70 When the maintenance menu appears, enter "c" to exit the operation. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu Please select a type of model which has FRU to be replaced. 1. BB (4s Building Block Model) 2. XBBOX (XB-BOX Model) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1,2|c:cancel] :c 6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition This section describes the procedure for incorporating a chassis into a physical partition by using dynamic reconfiguration (DR) after FRU maintenance. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the addboard command to incorporate the target chassis into the physical partition. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". Note - When you incorporate a system board with the addboard command, the target system board is incorporated into the physical partition after its hardware diagnosis. Therefore, it may take time for the command execution to complete. In the following example, PSB 01-0 is incorporated into PPAR-ID 0. XSCF> addboard -c configure -p 0 01-0 PSB#01-0 will be configured into PPAR-ID 0. Continue?[y|n] :y Start connecting PSB to PPAR. [3600sec] 0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240..... 270.....300.....330.....360.....390.....420.....450.....480.....510..... 540.....570.....600.....630.....660.....690.....720.....750.....780..... 810.....840.....870.....900.....930.....960.....end Connected PSB to PPAR. Start configuring PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager. [1800sec] 0.....end Configured PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager. Operation has completed. 3. Execute the showresult command to check the end status of the addboard command that was just executed. The following example shows that "0" is returned as the end status and the execution of the addboard command has been completed successfully. Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 71 XSCF> showresult 0 4. Execute the showboards command to confirm that the target chassis has been incorporated into the physical partition. The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number. In the following example, [Fault] of PSB 01-0 displays "Normal", which indicates that the system board is operating normally. XSCF> showboards -a PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment ---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00) Assigned 01-0 00(01) Assigned 5. Pwr ---y y Conn ---y y Conf ---y y Test ------Passed Passed Fault -------Normal Normal If you performed maintenance on a PCIe card using dynamic reconfiguration (DR), restore the devices that were released before the maintenance to their original configurations. Reassign the devices that were released from the root domain and I/O domains. # # # # # # ldm ldm ldm ldm ldm ldm add-io PCIE8 domain01 add-io PCIE9 domain01 add-io PCIE10 domain01 add-io PCIE11 domain01 remove-io /BB1/PCI0 domain01 (*1) add-io /BB1/PCI0 iodomain (*1) *1: PCIe slots are automatically assigned to the root domain. Therefore, to reassign them to I/O domains, they must be released and then reassigned. 6. Start the root domain and I/O domains. If a virtual service is provided, the virtual service is automatically restarted. Note - Start the root domain first, and then start I/O domains. # ldm start-domain domain01 # ldm start-domain iodomain 7. 72 If there is a guest domain that uses a virtual device, log in to the guest domain to restart the use of the device or incorporate it into the duplication function again. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance This section describes the procedure for powering on a physical partition requiring maintenance. 1. Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the FRU after the completion of maintenance. If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 4. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf SPARC M10-4S; + Serial:2081235006; Operator_Panel_Switch:Locked; + System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off; Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off; BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2047h; Serial:2081235006; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:160 GB; ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2047h; Serial:2081228004; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:128 GB; ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- 5. If the state of the master chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to the standby state before maintenance, execute the switchscf command to switch the chassis to the master XSCF. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby 6. Execute the poweron command to power on the stopped physical partition. Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 73 Enter the PPAR-ID you noted in advance by using the showboards command. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is specified. XSCF> poweron -p 0 6.4 Starting the Entire System This section describes the procedure for starting the entire system. The system can be started in either of the following two ways: ■ Starting the system with an XSCF command ■ 1. Starting the system from the operation panel Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on. Note - For a building block configuration, check the XSCF STANDBY LEDs of all the chassis constituting the system. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Locked mode. For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel." Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state. 4. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the FRU after the completion of maintenance. If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 5. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf SPARC M10-4S; + Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service; + System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On; Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running; BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:320 GB; 74 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci; + Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020; + Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000; + Model:; + Connection:7001; PCIBOX#7001; Status:Normal; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001; + FRU-Part-Number:; IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ; + FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P + FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA ; ; ; PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet; + Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000; + Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e; + Model:; ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- For details, see "3.3.3 6. Checking the status of a component." Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." After a short while, the following processes are performed. ■ ■ The POWER LED on the operation panel will be turned on. The power-on self-test (POST; self diagnosis when powering on) will be executed. Then, the system starts up. For details, see "6.1 Starting the System" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command 1. Execute the poweron command. In response to the confirmation message, enter "y". XSCF> poweron -a PPAR-IDs to power on:00,01 Continue? [y|n] :y 00 : Powering on 01 : Powering on 6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel 1. Press the power switch on the operation panel for 1 second or more (less Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 75 than 4 seconds). For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel." Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The power switches of the other chassis are disabled. 6.5 Restoring the Chassis This section describes operations required to restore the chassis. 6.5.1 Installing the power cord If the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box was removed to perform the maintenance work, connect the power cord and then attach the cable clamp to the power cord. 1. Connect the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S to the PSU backplane unit, or connect the power cord of the crossbar box to the power supply unit. Figure 6-1 76 Installing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 6-2 2. Installing the power cord (crossbar box) Clip the cable clamp around the power cord and then fix the cable clamp. The cable clamp is firmly fixed by locking the latch (A in the figure) and then pushing the cable clamp towards the front of the chassis. Figure 6-3 Locking the cable clamp (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) A Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 77 Figure 6-4 Locking the cable clamp (crossbar box) A 6.5.2 Fixing the cable support After performing maintenance on a component at the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M104S, lift the cable support and fix it in place. 1. Lift the cable support and lock it in place by pushing the upper and lower screw fittings towards the back (direction of the arrow). 78 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 6-5 2. Locking the cable support Tighten the right and left screws to fix the cable support. Note - Check that the cable support is firmly attached and fixed. 6.5.3 Installing the front cover If the front cover of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box was removed to perform maintenance, install it after installing the components at the front of or inside the chassis. 1. To install the front cover, insert the tabs of the front cover into the notches at Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 79 the bottom front of the chassis. 80 Figure 6-6 Installing the front cover (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Figure 6-7 Installing the front cover (crossbar box) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Check that the front cover is firmly attached and fixed. Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System 81 82 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the CPU memory unit mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. The CPU memory unit lower can only be replaced. The CPU memory unit upper can be replaced, expanded, and reduced. ■ Configuration of the CPU Memory Units 7.1 ■ Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit ■ Removing a CPU Memory Unit ■ Installing a CPU Memory Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the CPU Memory Units This section describes the configuration and locations of the CPU memory units. A CPU memory unit is composed of the following two parts: the CPU memory unit lower and the CPU memory unit upper. 83 Figure 7-1 Location of CPU memory unit (1) (2) Location number Component 1 CPU memory unit lower (CMUU) 2 CPU memory unit upper (CMUL) There are two types of CPU memory units: FRAME-A and FRAME-B. The type of a CPU memory unit can be determined from the indication on the label (A in the figure). If a CPU memory unit does not have the "FRAME-B" indication, it is a FRAME-A unit. 84 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-2 Type of CPU memory unit A 7.2 Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the CPU memory units, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 7.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 7-1 lists the types of maintenance for the CPU memory units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 85 Table 7-1 Type of maintenance for CPU memory unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported *1: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. *2: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 7.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 7-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the CPU memory units. To expand/reduce the CPU memory unit upper, it is necessary to remove/install the CPU memory unit lower. The procedure for expanding a CPU memory unit upper is the same as that for installing a CPU memory unit upper. The procedure for reducing a CPU memory unit upper is the same as that for removing a CPU memory unit upper. In addition, the CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower are connected by the PCI Express (PCIe) cable. The PCIe cable should be replaced when the CPU memory unit upper is replaced. Similarly, the cable is installed when the CPU memory unit upper is expanded, and removed when it is reduced. Table 7-2 Maintenance flow Task Lower unit replacement Upper unit replacement Upper unit expansion Upper unit reduction 1 Preparation 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 2 Accessing a CPU memory unit 7.4.1 7.4.1 7.4.1 7.4.1 3 Removing a CPU memory unit lower 7.4.2 7.4.2 7.4.2 7.4.2 4 Removing a CPU memory unit upper 7.4.3 7.4.3 - (*) 7.4.3 5 Removing a PCIe cable 7.4.4 - 7.4.4 7.4.4 6 Installing a PCIe cable 7.5.1 - 7.5.1 7.5.1 7 Installing a CPU memory unit upper 7.5.2 7.5.2 7.5.2 - (*) 8 Installing a CPU memory unit lower 7.5.3 7.5.3 7.5.3 7.5.3 9 Restoring the chassis 7.5.4 7.5.4 7.5.4 7.5.4 10 Restoring the system 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 * It is necessary to remove or install a filler unit. 86 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 7.2.3 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when you replace a CPU memory unit: ■ Do not replace a CPU memory unit at the same time as the PSU backplane unit. If you replace both a CPU memory unit and the PSU backplane unit at the same time, the system will fail to operate normally. Replace the CPU memory unit or PSU backplane unit, and then confirm that the newly installed part operates normally by executing the showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace the other Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 7.2.4 When replacing the CPU memory unit, memory modules should be removed from the old unit and remounted in the new one. Mount the new unit in the same position as the old unit. The weight of the CPU memory unit is 17 kg (37.4 lb). Maintenance must be done by two people if the CPU memory unit is mounted at the 24 or higher U of the rack. If you attempt to perform the maintenance work alone, you may injure yourself or cause damage to the chassis. For both the CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower, there are eight types based on the combinations of CPU type and the number of memory slots. Each type of CPU memory unit, both upper and lower, can be used in combination with one another. Before replacing the CPU memory unit lower, execute the dumpconfig command to save the system setting information. When the CPU memory unit lower is replaced, the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation keys may be deleted. To restore the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation keys that have been saved with the dumpconfig command, execute the restoreconfig command. The XCP firmware version must be the same before and after replacement of the CPU memory unit lower. For checking the version, see "4.2.2 Confirming the software and firmware configurations." Precautions for installation Note the following points when you expand a CPU memory unit upper: ■ You need to add four PCIe cables when connecting the CPU memory unit upper to the CPU memory unit lower. ■ The 2-CPU configuration of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S has four root complexes, and the 4-CPU configuration can have four, seven or eight root complexes. If you change a 2-CPU configuration into a 4-CPU configuration by adding CPU memory units on site, Fujitsu recommends a configuration with four root complexes. This configuration inherits the configuration and mounting rules of the I/O bus of the 2-CPU configuration. Adopting a configuration with seven or eight root complexes increases the maximum number of mounted PCIe cards. However, since the I/O bus is reconfigured, the physical partition needs to be reconfigured. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 87 A root complex consists of an I/O controller on a processor, PCI switches, and PCI devices under the I/O controller. ■ 7.2.5 For SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with two CPUs installed, if a CPU memory unit is expanded in order to add two CPUs when the I/O bus reconfiguration is "enabled", it will change the device paths of the I/O devices that have been used. Before adding the memory unit, execute the setpparmode command by specifying "false" for ioreconfigure with the -m function=mode option to "disable" the I/O bus reconfiguration function. Precautions for removal Note the following points when you reduce a CPU memory unit upper: You must also reduce the four PCIe cables for connecting the CPU memory unit upper with the CPU memory unit lower. ■ ■ 7.3 If a CPU memory unit is diminished to remove two CPUs, it will eliminate the root complexes for the two CPUs in use up to then, making some PCIe slots unavailable. To make the PCIe slots available, execute the setpparmode command by specifying "true" or "nextboot" for ioreconfigure with the -m function=mode option to "enable" the I/O bus reconfiguration function. Since the I/O bus is reconfigured, the physical partition must also be reconfigured. Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a CPU memory unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 88 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 7.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 7.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 89 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred. 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 7.3.3 System-stopped maintenance Note - When the CPU memory unit lower is replaced, all of the XSCF setting information may be lost. Perform this operation only after backing up the XSCF setting information. 90 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the dumpconfig command to backup the XSCF setting information only when replacing the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis configuration. For details, see "10.9.2 Saving XSCF setting information" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 If you are not replacing the CPU memory unit lower, backup is not necessary. Proceed to step 4. XSCF> dumpconfig 4. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred. 5. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 6. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 7. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 8. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 8. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 7.4 Removing a CPU Memory Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit. Remove the CPU memory unit lower first, then remove the CPU memory unit upper. Enable the removal of the CPU memory unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "7.3 Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit." Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 91 M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit. Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 7.4.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit 1. Remove the crossbar cables from the cable support. Perform this procedure only when using equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx. The procedure may vary depending on the model of the equipment rack. If you are not using equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx, proceed on to step 2. Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit. Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support (A in the figure) to which the crossbar cables are fixed. Figure 7-3 Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support A 92 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 c. Remove the screw securing the cable holder (A in the figure) that is fixed to the supporting column on the rear of the rack, and then install the cable holder by rotating it 180 degrees. Figure 7-4 Cable holder screw A d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable holder. Figure 7-5 Fixing crossbar cables Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 93 Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support (A in the figure) to which the crossbar cables are fixed. Figure 7-6 Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support A c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable holder installed on the supporting column on the rear of the rack. Figure 7-7 2. 94 Fixing crossbar cables Lower the cable support. For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3. Remove all the cables connected to the external interface on the rear of the chassis. The cables to be removed are as follows. ■ Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card ■ Crossbar cables (They may have been removed in step 1.) ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable ■ XSCF-LAN cable ■ Serial cable ■ LAN cable ■ SAS cable ■ USB cable Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 4. Remove all the PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 5. If any crossbar units are mounted, remove them. For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit." 6. Loosen the three screws holding the mounting frame and then remove it. Figure 7-8 Screws securing the mounting frame Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 95 7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit lower. Note - To expand or reduce a CPU memory unit upper, it is first necessary to remove the CPU memory unit lower. 1. Loosen the screws securing the levers of the CPU memory unit lower (rear left side) and then lower the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit lower to the horizontal position. Figure 7-9 2. 96 Position of the screws and the levers of the CPU memory unit lower Hold the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit lower and pull out the CPU memory unit lower about 10 cm (3.9 in.) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-10 3. Pulling out CPU memory unit lower Remove the CPU memory unit lower while supporting it from below with one hand. Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit lower on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Note - Be careful not to damage the right and left levers when placing the CPU memory unit on the ESD mat. Figure 7-11 4. Removing the CPU memory unit lower Remove the CPU memory unit upper or the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper. For details, see "7.4.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper." You can expand the CPU memory unit upper by performing the above steps. You do not have to perform step 5. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 97 5. Remove the memory modules from the CPU memory unit lower and install them in the new CPU memory unit lower. For details, see "8.5 Removing Memory" and "8.6 Installing Memory." Note - Mount the memory in the same position as it was mounted in the removed CPU memory unit lower. 7.4.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper Removal of a CPU memory unit upper is performed after removal of the CPU memory unit lower. Perform reduction using the same procedure. You can remove a filler unit by performing the procedure up to step 9. Note - This work should all be performed from the rear of the rack. 1. Remove the CPU memory unit lower. For details, see "7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower." Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit lower on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 2. Unlock (push) the top cover of the CPU memory unit and remove the cover by sliding it in the direction of the arrow. Figure 7-12 3. 98 Releasing the lock Unlock (push) the right-side guide and remove it by sliding it in the direction of the arrow. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-13 4. Unlock (push) the left-side guide (when viewed from the rear) and remove it by sliding it in the direction of the arrow. Figure 7-14 5. Removing right-side guide Removing left-side guide Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the right side that connect Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 99 the CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper. In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not present. Figure 7-15 Removing the right-side PCIe cables A 6. 100 Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the left side that connect the CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper. In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not present. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-16 Removing the left-side cables A 7. Of the two PCIe cables on the left side, also remove the rear one from the CPU memory unit lower, as it is short. In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not present. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 101 Figure 7-17 Removing the PCIe cable from the left side rear Perform the following work from the rear side of the chassis. Figure 7-18 shows the standing position (A in the figure) of a field engineer. 102 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-18 Standing position of a field engineer A 8. Raise the levers (A in the figure) on the right and left sides to release the CPU memory unit upper. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 103 Figure 7-19 Positions of right and left levers A A 9. While holding the levers, slightly lift the CPU memory unit upper. 10. Lift the CPU memory unit upwards and then remove it carefully. Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit upper on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Figure 7-20 104 Removing CPU memory unit upper Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11. Remove the memory modules from the removed CPU memory unit upper and then install them in the new CPU memory unit upper. For details, see "8.5 Removing Memory" and "8.6 Installing Memory." Note - Mount the memory in the same position as it was mounted in the removed CPU memory unit upper. 7.4.4 Removing a PCI Express cable Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2. When reducing a CPU memory unit upper or when replacing a PCIe cable, remove the PCIe cable. You can expand a CPU memory unit upper by performing the above procedure up to step 9. For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, perform the procedure from step 2. 1. Remove the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on the rear of the CPU memory unit lower. Use a flathead screwdriver (small) to remove them. For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary. Figure 7-21 Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 105 2. Loosen the two screws holding the upper rear side of the CPU memory unit lower. Then, remove the rear cover (A in the figure) by pulling it in the direction of the arrow. Figure 7-22 Removing the rear cover A 3. 106 Remove the XSCF board. - For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Remove the three screws fixing the XSCF board (A in the figure) and rear cover. Tilt the right lever of the XSCF mount with your fingers about 5 mm (0.2 in.) to the right (B in the figure). Lift up the right side of the XSCF board and release the connection of the connector (C in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-23 Releasing a connected XSCF board (for SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A B C - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Remove the four screws fixing the XSCF board (A in the figure). Then, lift the right side of the XSCF board to release the connector. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 107 Figure 7-24 Releasing a connected XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A 4. Pull out the XSCF board diagonally to the right (arrow). Note - Place the removed XSCF board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Figure 7-25 108 Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-26 5. Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Remove the screw fixing the XSCF mount. - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Remove the one screw fixing the XSCF mount (A in the figure). Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 109 Figure 7-27 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A 110 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-28 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Remove the two screws fixing the XSCF mount (A in the figure). Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 111 Figure 7-29 Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) A 6. 112 Remove the XSCF mount. - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Raise the protruding left lever (B in the figure) of the XSCF mount (A in the figure) by about 2 mm (0.1 in.) with your fingers, and slide it about 8 mm (0.4 in.) toward the front (C in the figure). Then, remove it upward (D in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-30 B Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A D C Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 113 Figure 7-31 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A B D C - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Remove the XSCF mount (A in the figure) upward (B in the figure). 114 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-32 Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) A 7. B Remove the screw fixing the CPU memory unit board. - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) fixing the center part of the radiator on the front and the four screws fixing the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure). Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 115 Figure 7-33 Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M104S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A B - For SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) fixing the center part of the radiator on the front and the six screws fixing the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure). 116 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-34 Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) A B 8. Place your thumb on the frame located at the center of the right and left sides of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and insert your fingers under the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure) from the side of the connector unit. Note - Be careful not to touch or catch your clothes or wrist strap on a connector pin located on the back side of the CPU memory unit board. Note - Hard objects such as a machine tools should not come in contact with the connector located on the back side of the CPU memory unit board. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 117 Figure 7-35 Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (surface) A A Left Figure 7-36 Right Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (rear surface) B B Right 9. 118 Left Supporting the frame with your thumb (A in the figure), disconnect the connection of the connector by pushing up the left and right sides at the Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 same time with the fingers that are inserted under the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure). Figure 7-37 How to disconnect the connection of the connector A A B B 10. Place your thumb on the connector unit located at the center of the right and left sides of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and hold the board by inserting your fingers under the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure) from the side of the connector unit. Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 119 Figure 7-38 Finger position when holding the board (surface) A A Left Figure 7-39 Right Finger position when holding the board (rear surface) B B Right Left 11. Lift the CPU memory unit board in the horizontal position and remove it from the frame. 120 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-40 Removing the CPU memory unit board 12. Remove the sheet (A in the figure). You can expand the CPU memory unit upper by performing the above procedure. You do not have to perform step 10. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 121 Figure 7-41 Removing the sheet A 13. Remove the three PCIe cables. The direction in which the PCIe cables are removed varies depending on the type of the CPU memory unit. Note - Do not attempt to remove a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is used to remove a PCIe cable, it may be damaged. - The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit 122 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-42 Removing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit) - The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory unit and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 123 Figure 7-43 7.5 Removing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit) Installing a CPU Memory Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a CPU memory unit. Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit. Note - When mounting a CPU memory unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and CPU memory unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If there is a bent pin in a connector, mounting a CPU memory unit may damage the chassis or CPU memory unit. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 7.5.1 Installing a PCI Express cable Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2. 124 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 When expanding the CPU memory unit upper or when replacing a PCIe cable, connect the PCIe cable. You can reduce a CPU memory unit upper by performing the procedure from step 2. Note - When expanding a CPU memory unit upper, first connect the PCIe cable to the CPU memory unit lower. The PCIe cables are attached as an accessory of the CPU memory unit upper. 1. Connect the three PCIe cables by matching their position labels of the PCle cable with the corresponding position marks on the PCIBP board (A in the figure). The direction in which the PCIe cables are installed varies depending on the type of the CPU memory unit. When reducing a CPU memory unit upper, you do not have to perform this step because the PCIe cables are not present. Note - Do not attempt to install a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is used to install a PCIe cable, it may be damaged. Note - Ensure that the PCIe cables are firmly connected and secure. - The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit Figure 7-44 Installing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit) A - The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 125 unit and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit Figure 7-45 Installing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside and the two facing the front of the CPU memory unit) A 2. 126 Install the sheet (A in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-46 Installing sheet A 3. Hold the connector unit at the center of the CPU memory unit board and install it on the frame in the horizontal position. For how to hold the CPU memory unit board, see Figure 7-38 and Figure 7-39. Note - Do not tilt the CPU memory unit board when installing it. The board may be damaged by hitting the back side of the board against a protruding part or the frame guide. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 127 Figure 7-47 Correct position of the CPU memory unit board OK Figure 7-48 Wrong position of the CPU memory unit board NO - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Install the frame so that the bent tip of the frame (C in the figure) can be inserted into the space (B in the figure) between the end face of the far side of the CPU memory unit board and the radiator (A in the figure). a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal. b. If the threaded hole of the board and the threaded hole of the frame (D in the figure) do not match when inserting the frame, place the board by adjusting the position of the frame so that the outer circumference of the 128 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 threaded hole of the frame can be seen (E in the figure). c. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (F and G in the figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the same time. Figure 7-49 Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A C B F G D E - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Install the CPU memory unit board with the left and right guides (A and B in the figure) and the left guide on the board (C in the figure) as a guide. a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal. b. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (D and E in the figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the same time. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 129 Figure 7-50 Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) A B E D C 4. 130 Fix the CPU memory unit board with screws. - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Fix the CPU memory unit board with four screws and the center part of the radiator on the front with one black screw. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Fix the CPU memory unit board with six screws. 5. Install the XSCF mount and fix it with screws. - For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit Align the one point on the left and two points on the right of the XSCF mount with the frame guides of the CPU memory unit lower. Then, install the XSCF mount by sliding it to the front and fix it with one screw. Figure 7-51 Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) - For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit Align the left protruding part (A in the figure) of the XSCF mount with the frame guide of the CPU memory unit lower to install the XSCF mount. Then, fix it with two screws (B in the figure). Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 131 Figure 7-52 Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) A 6. 132 B Install the XSCF board. - For the SPARC M10-4 with FRAME-A CPU memory unit Insert the XSCF board into guides at the two locations (A in the figure) on the mount (B in the figure), and push the right lever of the mount about 5 mm (0.2 in.) to the right (C in the figure) to attach (E in the figure) the connector unit (D in the figure). Then, fix it with one screw (F in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-53 Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A E B C D F - For the SPARC M10-4S with FRAME-A CPU memory unit Insert the XSCF board into the left guide (A in the figure), and press down the right connector unit (B in the figure) to attach the connector. Then, fix it with two screws. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 133 Figure 7-54 Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) A B 7. 134 Attach the rear cover with two screws from the upper part of the rear side of the CPU memory unit lower. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-55 Screws for rear cover A 8. Install the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on the rear of the CPU memory unit lower. For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 135 Figure 7-56 7.5.2 Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Installing the CPU memory unit upper Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2. Install the CPU memory unit upper to the CPU memory unit lower. Perform expansion using the same procedure. 1. Install the CPU memory unit upper on the CPU memory unit lower. - When installing the CPU memory unit upper Carefully install the CPU memory unit upper by setting the four guides (A in the figure) of the CPU memory unit upper into the grooves (B in the figure) of the CPU memory unit lower. Note - Confirm that the levers on the left and right sides of the CPU memory unit upper are closed. 136 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-57 Guide positions of the CPU memory unit upper A A A B A B B B - When installing the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper Carefully install the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper by setting the two guides (A in the figure) of the filler unit in the groove (B in the figure) of the CPU memory unit lower. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 137 Figure 7-58 Guide positions of the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper A A B B 2. 138 Install the CPU memory unit upper by holding it down from the center where the label "PUSH" is applied, and then push it into place. Firmly push the unit so that there is no space between the CPU memory unit upper and the frame of the CPU memory unit lower. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-59 3. Position where the CPU memory unit upper is pushed Connect, to the CPU memory unit upper, the four right and left PCIe cables connecting the CPU memory units upper and lower. While pressing the pin that locks the PCIe cable, insert it vertically. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 139 Note - Of the two PCIe cables on the right side, also install the one (short) cable on the rear of the CPU memory unit lower. 4. Install the right- and left-side guides. Each guide has four clips. Install the guides using the clips, and slide each guide while pushing its lock. Note - Be careful not to damage the PCIe cable when installing the left- and right-side guides. Figure 7-60 140 Positions of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-61 Positions of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 141 Figure 7-62 142 CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-63 CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 143 Figure 7-64 144 Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 7-65 Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit) 5. Install the top-side cover of the CPU memory unit. 6. Install the CPU memory unit lower in the chassis. For details, see "7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory unit lower." Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 145 7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory unit lower 1. Install the CPU memory unit upper or a filler unit for a CPU memory unit upper. For details, see "7.5.2 Installing the CPU memory unit upper." 2. Insert the CPU memory unit lower into the chassis while supporting it from below with one hand. 3. Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit lower to secure it. Note - If the CPU memory unit lower is inserted as far as it will go, it may not be possible to lift the lever. Lift the lever just before the CPU memory unit lower hits the rear and then push it fully home. 7.5.4 Restoring the chassis 1. If a crossbar unit was mounted, install the mounting frame and then tighten the three screws. 2. If any crossbar units were mounted, reinstall all of them. For details, see "9.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit." 3. Install all the PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 4. Connect all the cables for the external interface. The cables to be connected are as follows. ■ ■ 146 Interface cable connected to the PCIe card Crossbar cables (If equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx is used, connect them in step 6.) ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable ■ XSCF-LAN cable ■ Serial cable ■ LAN cable ■ SAS cable ■ USB cable Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Reinstall the cables in the correct positions by referring to the notes you made before starting maintenance. 5. Lift the cable support to fix it. For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support." If you are not using equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx, the procedure ends here. You do not have to perform step 6. 6. Connect the crossbar cables to the cable support. Perform this procedure only when equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx is used. The procedure may vary depending on the model of the equipment rack. Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used a. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the crossbar cables from the cable holder. b. Remove the screw securing the cable holder, and then rotate the cable holder through 180 degrees to install it on the supporting column at the rear of the rack. c. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit. d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable support. Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made before the start of maintenance. Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used a. Remove the crossbar cables from the hook-and-loop fastener installed on the supporting column on the rear of the rack. b. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit. c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable support. Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made before the start of maintenance. 7.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after a CPU memory unit is replaced, expanded, or reduced. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 147 Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 7.6.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error 148 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "3.3.5 7.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Incorporate the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 6. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. When the system is configured without a hardware RAID 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 149 XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 5. Checking log information." Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode. 6. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is operating normally after maintenance. If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 7. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 8. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 9. Close the rack door. When the system is configured with a hardware RAID 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 150 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 5. Checking log information." Execute the setpparparam command to deactivate the Autoboot function of the control domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? false" 6. Execute the setpparmode command to deactivate the Autoboot function of the guest domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=off 7. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 8. The ok prompt appears. 9. Enable the RAID volume to check the status. For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 10. Execute the setpparparam command to activate the Autoboot function of the control domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? true" 11. Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 151 Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode. 12. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is operating normally after maintenance. If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 13. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 14. Close the rack door. 7.6.3 System-stopped maintenance When the system is configured without a hardware RAID 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 4. 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected 152 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information only when the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis configuration has been replaced. If the CPU memory unit lower is has not been replaced, restoration is not necessary. Proceed to step 5. a. Log in to the XSCF shell. Note - If you cannot log in with an XSCF user account and password, use the default user account of the XSCF to log in to the XSCF. For details, see "6.3 Logging In to the XSCF" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide. b. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information that has been saved with the dumpconfig command. For details, see "10.9.3 Restoring XSCF setting information" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. XSCF> restoreconfig c. Execute the version command to confirm the firmware version information. If the version does not match the one before the replacement, update the firmware. For details, see "16.1.3 Updating firmware" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 5. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 6. Checking log information." Execute the testsb command to confirm that the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is normally recognized. For a building block configuration, you do not have to execute the testsb command. Proceed to step 7. When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 153 XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0 7. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is operating normally after maintenance. If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 8. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 9. Execute the showdate command to confirm the XSCF time. There is no need to set the time if the NTP server is set to the XSCF. Proceed to step 11. XSCF> showdate 10. If the XSCF time is different from the current time, execute the setdate command to set the time. Specify the time in either of the following formats: yyyy.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss year.month.day-hour (24-hour clock):minute:second MMDDhhmmyyyy.ss monthdayhour (24-hour clock) minuteyear.second In the following example, "October 20, 2013 16:59:00" is specified. XSCF> setdate -s 102016592013.00 11. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 12. Close the rack door. When the system is configured with a hardware RAID 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 154 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 4. 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information only when the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis configuration has been replaced. If the CPU memory unit lower is has not been replaced, restoration is not necessary. Proceed to step 5. a. Log in to the XSCF shell. Note - If you cannot log in with an XSCF user account and password, use the default user account of the XSCF to log in to the XSCF. For details, see "6.3 Resetting the System" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide. b. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information that has been saved with the dumpconfig command. For details, see "6.3 Logging In to the XSCF" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. XSCF> restoreconfig c. Execute the version command to confirm the firmware version information. If the version does not match the one before the replacement, update the firmware. For details, see "16.1.3 Updating firmware" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 5. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 155 normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 6. Checking log information." Execute the testsb command to confirm that the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is normally recognized. For a building block configuration, you do not have to execute the testsb command. Proceed to step 7. When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0 7. Execute the setpparparam command to deactivate the Autoboot function of the control domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? false" 8. Execute the setpparmode command to deactivate the Autoboot function of the guest domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=off 9. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 10. The ok prompt appears. 11. Enable the RAID volume to check the status. For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 12. Execute the setpparmode command to activate the Autoboot function of the guest domain. In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot. XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=on 13. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is operating normally after maintenance. 156 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 If there is no problem, nothing is displayed. XSCF> showstatus 14. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the hardware configuration and the status of each CPU memory unit. Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 15. Execute the showdate command to confirm the XSCF time. There is no need to set the time if the NTP server is set to the XSCF. Proceed to step 17. XSCF> showdate 16. If the XSCF time is different from the current time, execute the setdate command to set the time. Specify the time in either of the following formats: yyyy.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss year.month.day-hour (24-hour clock):minute:second MMDDhhmmyyyy.ss monthdayhour (24-hour clock) minuteyear.second In the following example, "October 20, 2013 16:59:00" is specified. XSCF> setdate -s 102016592013.00 17. Close the rack door. Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units 157 158 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the memory mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Memory can be replaced, expanded, and reduced. ■ Memory Configuration 8.1 ■ Memory Configuration Rules ■ Before Maintaining Memory ■ Enabling the Removal of Memory ■ Removing Memory ■ Installing Memory ■ Restoring the System Memory Configuration This section describes the configuration and location of memory. A maximum of 32 memory modules can be implemented in one CPU memory unit. One chassis can contain two CPU memory units; the CPU memory unit upper and lower. Therefore, the maximum number of memory modules that can be implemented in one chassis is 64. Figure 8-1 shows the memory locations and the memory groups of the CPU memory unit lower, while Figure 8-2 shows those of the CPU memory unit upper. 159 Figure 8-1 Memory locations (CPU memory unit lower) CMUL (15) (16) (13) (14) (7) (8) (5) (6) CPU#0 (2) (1) (4) (3) (10) (9) (12) (11) (27) (28) (25) (26) (19) (20) (17) (18) CPU#1 (22) (21) (24) (23) (30) (29) (32) (31) Front 160 Location number Component Group 1 Memory (CMUL/MEM#00A) A 2 Memory (CMUL/MEM#00B) B 3 Memory (CMUL/MEM#01A) A 4 Memory (CMUL/MEM#01B) B 5 Memory (CMUL/MEM#02A) A 6 Memory (CMUL/MEM#02B) B Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Location number Component Group 7 Memory (CMUL/MEM#03A) A 8 Memory (CMUL/MEM#03B) B 9 Memory (CMUL/MEM#04A) A 10 Memory (CMUL/MEM#04B) B 11 Memory (CMUL/MEM#05A) A 12 Memory (CMUL/MEM#05B) B 13 Memory (CMUL/MEM#06A) A 14 Memory (CMUL/MEM#06B) B 15 Memory (CMUL/MEM#07A) A 16 Memory (CMUL/MEM#07B) B 17 Memory (CMUL/MEM#10A) A 18 Memory (CMUL/MEM#10B) B 19 Memory (CMUL/MEM#11A) A 20 Memory (CMUL/MEM#11B) B 21 Memory (CMUL/MEM#12A) A 22 Memory (CMUL/MEM#12B) B 23 Memory (CMUL/MEM#13A) A 24 Memory (CMUL/MEM#13B) B 25 Memory (CMUL/MEM#14A) A 26 Memory (CMUL/MEM#14B) B 27 Memory (CMUL/MEM#15A) A 28 Memory (CMUL/MEM#15B) B 29 Memory (CMUL/MEM#16A) A 30 Memory (CMUL/MEM#16B) B 31 Memory (CMUL/MEM#17A) A 32 Memory (CMUL/MEM#17B) B Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 161 Figure 8-2 Memory locations (CPU memory unit upper) CMUU (47) (48) (45) (46) (39) (40) (37) (38) CPU#0 (34) (33) (36) (35) (42) (41) (44) (43) (59) (60) (57) (58) (51) (52) (49) (50) CPU#1 (54) (53) (56) (55) (62) (61) (64) (63) Front 162 Location number Component Group 33 Memory (CMUU/MEM#00A) A 34 Memory (CMUU/MEM#00B) B 35 Memory (CMUU/MEM#01A) A 36 Memory (CMUU/MEM#01B) B 37 Memory (CMUU/MEM#02A) A 38 Memory (CMUU/MEM#02B) B 39 Memory (CMUU/MEM#03A) A Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 8.2 Location number Component Group 40 Memory (CMUU/MEM#03B) B 41 Memory (CMUU/MEM#04A) A 42 Memory (CMUU/MEM#04B) B 43 Memory (CMUU/MEM#05A) A 44 Memory (CMUU/MEM#05B) B 45 Memory (CMUU/MEM#06A) A 46 Memory (CMUU/MEM#06B) B 47 Memory (CMUU/MEM#07A) A 48 Memory (CMUU/MEM#07B) B 49 Memory (CMUU/MEM#10A) A 50 Memory (CMUU/MEM#10B) B 51 Memory (CMUU/MEM#11A) A 52 Memory (CMUU/MEM#11B) B 53 Memory (CMUU/MEM#12A) A 54 Memory (CMUU/MEM#12B) B 55 Memory (CMUU/MEM#13A) A 56 Memory (CMUU/MEM#13B) B 57 Memory (CMUU/MEM#14A) A 58 Memory (CMUU/MEM#14B) B 59 Memory (CMUU/MEM#15A) A 60 Memory (CMUU/MEM#15B) B 61 Memory (CMUU/MEM#16A) A 62 Memory (CMUU/MEM#16B) B 63 Memory (CMUU/MEM#17A) A 64 Memory (CMUU/MEM#17B) B Memory Configuration Rules This section describes the memory mounting rules and the method for checking memory information. Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 163 8.2.1 Memory mounting rules Install the memory in accordance with the following rules: ■ Mount memory in units of eight modules. ■ ■ ■ Within a unit of eight modules, all the memory modules must be of the same capacity and rank. For memory for one CPU, use only R-DIMM (Registered DIMM: 8 GB/16 GB/32 GB) or only LR-DIMM (Load Reduced DIMM: 64 GB). First mount memory group A and then mount memory group B. Figure 8-3 shows the mounting locations of all the memory modules. Each eight-module unit of mounted memory is indicated by letters a to f. Table 8-1, Table 8-2 and Table 8-3 list the supported memory installation configurations. The memory mounting locations may vary depending on the number of mounted CPU memory units. Refer to this figure and table when you expand or reduce memory. As for the mounting order of memory group B, give priority to using a uniform memory type of either R-DIMM or LR-DIMM for one CPU over the memory mounting patterns in Table 8-1, Table 8-2, and Table 8-3. 164 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 MEM#10B MEM#10A MEM#11B MEM#11A MEM#14B MEM#14A MEM#15B MEM#15A MEM#02B MEM#02A MEM#03B MEM#03A MEM#06B MEM#06A MEM#07B MEM#07A MEM#10B MEM#10A MEM#11B MEM#11A MEM#14B MEM#14A MEM#15B MEM#15A CMUU Chapter 8 MEM#13A MEM#16B MEM#16A MEM#17B MEM#17A MEM#01A MEM#04B MEM#04A MEM#05B MEM#05A MEM#13A MEM#16B MEM#16A MEM#17B MEM#17A MEM#13B CPU#1 MEM#01B g d MEM#13B CPU#0 MEM#12A c MEM#00A f Front MEM#12A CPU#1 MEM#12B MEM#05A MEM#05B MEM#04A MEM#04B MEM#01A MEM#01B MEM#00A MEM#00B CPU#0 MEM#00B CMUL MEM#12B MEM#02B MEM#02A MEM#03B MEM#03A MEM#06B MEM#06A MEM#07B MEM#07A Figure 8-3 Mounting locations and units of memory a e b h Front Maintaining the Memory 165 When only the CPU memory unit lower is mounted Table 8-1 Memory mounting configurations (CMUL only) Number of memory modules Mounted memory 8 a in Figure 8-3 - - - 16 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 - - 24 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 - 32 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 When both the CPU memory unit lower and the CPU memory unit upper are mounted Table 8-2 Memory mounting patterns (CMUL and CMUU) Number of memory modules Mounted memory 8 a in Figure 8-3 - - - - - - - 16 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 - - - - - - 24 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 - - - - - 32 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 - - - - 40 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 - - - 48 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 - - 56 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 g in Figure 8-3 - 64 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 g in Figure 8-3 h in Figure 8-3 When expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which only a CPU memory unit lower is mounted If you mount memory by expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which only a CPU memory unit lower is mounted, you do not have to remove the memory mounted on the CPU memory unit lower. 166 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Install it by observing the mounting configurations shown in either Table 8-3or Table 8-2. Table 8-3 Memory mounting configurations (CMUL and expanded CMUU) Number of memory modules Mounted memory 8 a in Figure 8-3 - 16 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 - - - - - - 24 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 - - - - - 32 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 - - - - 40 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 - - - 48 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 - - 56 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 g in Figure 8-3 - 64 a in Figure 8-3 b in Figure 8-3 e in Figure 8-3 f in Figure 8-3 c in Figure 8-3 d in Figure 8-3 g in Figure 8-3 h in Figure 8-3 8.2.2 Checking memory information Check the type and size of the memory by using the showhardconf command of the XSCF firmware. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showhardconf command to check the memory information. The capacity and rank of the memory are displayed. XSCF> showhardconf ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------MBU Status:Normal; Ver:2004h; Serial:USDA-P00007 ; + FRU-Part-Number:CA20366-B10X 002AB/LGA-MBU -01 ; + Power_Supply_System: Dual ; + Memory_Size:32 GB; CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial: 00010448; + Freq:2.800 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; MEM#00A Status:Normal; + Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9 0000-85A8EFD9; + Type:01; Size:4 GB; MEM#01A Status:Normal; Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 167 + Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9 + Type:01; Size:4 GB; MEM#02A Status:Normal; + Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9 + Type:01; Size:4 GB; MEM#03A Status:Normal; + Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9 + Type:01; Size:4 GB; Figure 8-4 0000-85A8EF57; 0000-85A8EF65; 0000-85A8EE2C; Viewing memory information MEM#00A Status:Normal; Memory slot + Code:ce8002M393B5270DHO-YH9 0000-83AE9A65; + Type:04; Size:8 GB; Capacity and rank 04: R-DIMM (8GB 1rank) 07: R-DIMM (16GB 2rank) 09: R-DIMM (32GB 4rank) 47: LR-DIMM (64GB 8rank) 8.3 Before Maintaining Memory This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the memory, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 8.3.1 Types of maintenance Table 8-4 lists the types of memory maintenance. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 8-4 Types of maintenance for memory Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported 168 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 8-4 Types of maintenance for memory (continued) Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported *1: *2: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 8.3.2 Maintenance flow Table 8-5 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for memory. The procedure for expanding memory is the same as that for installing memory. The procedure for reducing memory is the same as that for removing memory. Table 8-5 8.3.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement Expansion Reduction 1 Preparation 8.4 8.4 8.4 2 Removing a CPU memory unit 7.4 7.4 7.4 3 Removing memory 8.5 - 8.5 4 Installing memory 8.6 8.6 - 5 Installing a CPU memory unit 7.5 7.5 7.5 6 Restoring the system 8.7 8.7 8.7 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing memory: ■ When you replace a memory module, make sure that you install the new module in the same position as the original one. 8.3.4 Precautions for installation Note the following points when expanding memory: ■ Observe the memory installation rules when you expand memory. For details, see "8.2.1 Memory mounting rules." ■ Apply XCP 2080 or later when you expand 64 GB memory. Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 169 8.3.5 Precautions for removal Note the following points when removing memory: Observe the memory installation rules when you remove memory. For details, see "8.2.1 Memory mounting rules." ■ 8.4 Enabling the Removal of Memory This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal of memory. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 8.4.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 170 Checking log information." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred. 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the building block, in which the memory requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 8.4.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred. 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 171 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 8.4.3 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred. 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 172 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 8.5 Removing Memory This section describes the procedure for removing memory. Perform reduction using the same procedure. Enable the removal of the memory before you attempting to remove it. For details, see "8.4 Enabling the Removal of Memory." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 8.5.1 Accessing memory 1. Perform the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the CPU memory unit. For details, see "7.4.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit." 2. Remove the CPU memory unit. To remove the memory mounted on the CPU memory unit upper, see steps 1 through 3 as described in "7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower." To remove the memory mounted on the CPU memory unit lower, see "7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower" and steps 1 through 10 in "7.4.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper." 8.5.2 Removing memory 1. Open the clip of the memory slot outwards and remove the memory by pulling it straight up. Note - Place the removed memory on a grounded static-removal ESD mat. Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 173 Figure 8-5 8.6 Removing memory Installing Memory This section describes the procedure for installing a memory module. Perform expansion using the same procedure. 8.6.1 Installing memory 1. Place the memory module by aligning the notched section with the corresponding part of the memory slot connector. 2. Push the memory module into the slot evenly. Note - Confirm that the clip of the memory slot has returned to its original position. 174 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 8.6.2 Restoring the chassis 1. Install the CPU memory unit. If you have installed the memory of the CPU memory unit upper, see "7.5.2 Installing the CPU memory unit upper." If you have installed the memory of the CPU memory unit lower, see "7.5.2 Installing the CPU memory unit upper" and "7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory unit lower." 2. 8.7 Restore the chassis. For details, see "7.5.4 Restoring the chassis." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after replacement, addition, and removal of memory. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 8.7.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 175 that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 8.7.2 Checking log information." 5. Incorporate the chassis, in which the memory requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 6. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 176 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." 3. Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 5. Checking log information." Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode. 6. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the memory after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 7. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 8. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 9. Close the rack door. Chapter 8 Maintaining the Memory 177 8.7.3 System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 3. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the memory requiring maintenance is recognized. XSCF> testsb -a 4. 178 Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar units mounted on a SPARC M10-4S. ■ Configuration of the Crossbar Units 9.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit ■ Removing a Crossbar Unit ■ Installing a Crossbar Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Crossbar Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the crossbar units. The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S are connected to the crossbar units of other SPARC M10-4S units or to a crossbar box for system extension. Two crossbar units are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S. When performing maintenance, perform the work one unit at a time. 179 Figure 9-1 Location of crossbar units 㩿㪈㪀 㩿㪉㪀 9.2 Location number Component 1 Crossbar unit (XBU#0) 2 Crossbar unit (XBU#1) Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the crossbar units. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 9.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 9-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 180 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 9-1 Types of maintenance for the crossbar unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*) Unsupported Supported Supported *: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 9.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 9-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar units. Table 9-2 9.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 9.3 2 Removing the crossbar units 9.4 3 Installing the crossbar unit 9.5 4 Restoring the system 9.6 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit This section describes preparation that must be completed prior to removing a crossbar unit. The procedure for the preparation varies depending on the maintenance type, as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 181 9.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the building block, in which the memory requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 9.3.2 182 Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 9.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 183 For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 9.4 Removing a Crossbar Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a crossbar unit. Enable the removal of the crossbar unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "9.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 9.4.1 Accessing a crossbar unit 1. Lower the cable support. For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support." Note - If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop fastener, remove the hook-and-loop fastener. 2. Remove all the crossbar cables connected to the crossbar units requiring maintenance. Note - Make a note of the positions of the crossbar cables before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit 1. 184 Loosen the two screws securing the crossbar unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 9-2 2. Location of screws securing crossbar units Open the eject levers (A in the figure) upwards and downwards, respectively, and then pull the crossbar unit out of the CPU memory unit. Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 185 Figure 9-3 Opening the eject levers A 3. Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and carefully remove it from the mounting frame. Note - Place the removed crossbar unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 9.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a crossbar unit. Note - When mounting a crossbar unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and crossbar unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a crossbar unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or crossbar unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 186 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 9.5.1 9.5.2 Installing a crossbar unit 1. Open the eject levers of the crossbar unit. 2. Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and then carefully insert it into the mounting frame. 3. Close the eject levers and tighten the two screws securing the crossbar unit. Restoring the chassis 1. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit. Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 9.6 Lift the cable support to fix it. For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the crossbar units. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance 9.6.1 ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 187 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 9.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Incorporate the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 6. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 188 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." 3. Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 5. Checking log information." Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (without crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode. - For a building block configuration (with crossbar box) Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode. 6. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the crossbar units after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 7. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 8. Start the system. For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2 Starting the system from the operation panel." 9. Close the rack door. Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units 189 9.6.3 System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 190 Checking log information." 5. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 6. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the power supply units mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. ■ Configuration of the Power Supply Units 10.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit ■ Removing a Power Supply Unit ■ Installing a Power Supply Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Power Supply Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the power supply units. The power supply units feed power to the individual components. The components can have the 1+1 redundant configuration. Active/hot maintenance can be performed. 191 Figure 10-1 Location of power supply unit (1) 10.2 (2) Location number Component 1 Power supply unit (PSU#0) 2 Power supply unit (PSU#1) Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the power supply units, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 10.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 10-1 lists the types of maintenance for the power supply units. For the 192 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Table 10-1 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Types of maintenance for the power supply unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Supported Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Building block configuration Supported (*2) Supported (*3) Supported Supported Supported *1: *2: *3: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 10.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 10-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the power supply units. Table 10-2 10.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 10.3 2 Removing a power supply unit 10.4 3 Installing a power supply unit 10.5 4 Restoring the system 10.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing a power supply unit: ■ There are two power supply units. Thus, the system can continue operating even if one of the units fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended period while one unit has failed. ■ ■ When replacing multiple power supply units, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the power supply unit cannot be assured, then system-stopped maintenance must be performed. Do not force push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 193 10.3 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal of a power supply unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 10.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance Note - Active/hot maintenance is supported only for a redundant configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru 194 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "5.1 Command." 10.3.2 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the chassis, in which the power supply unit requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 195 10.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the physical partition requiring maintenance is powered off. XSCF> showpparstatus -a 7. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru For a building-block configuration 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 4. 196 Checking log information." Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 10.3.4 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 197 10.3.5 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 7. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 10.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a power supply unit. Enable the removal of the power supply unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "10.3 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit." 198 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 10.4.1 Accessing a power supply unit 1. 10.4.2 Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." Removing a power supply unit 1. Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance. 2. Loosen the screws securing the power supply unit and open the lever. Figure 10-2 Screws securing power supply unit 3. Hold the lever and pull the power supply unit out of the chassis. 4. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and remove it carefully from its slot. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 199 Note - Place the removed power supply unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 10.5 Installing a Power Supply Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a power supply unit. 10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit 1. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and insert it carefully into its slot. Note - Do not forcibly push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 10.5.2 10.6 2. Firmly push the power supply unit into its mounting position. 3. Close the lever and then tighten the screws. 4. Connect the power cords to the power supply unit. Restoring the chassis 1. Connect the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. 2. Confirm that the LED (green) on the power supply unit is blinking. 3. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a power supply unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 200 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 10.6.1 ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the power supply unit after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 3. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 4. 10.6.2 Close the rack door. Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 201 For details, see "6.1 Command." 10.6.3 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru 3. Incorporate the chassis, in which the power supply unit requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 4. Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 4. Close the rack door. For a building-block configuration 10.6.4 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. 202 Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 10.6.5 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 3. 3. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units 203 204 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan units mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. ■ Configuration of the Fan Units 11.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Fan Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit ■ Removing a Fan Unit ■ Installing a Fan Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Fan Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the fan units. Five fan units are mounted in each chassis. Each fan unit has two cooling fans that cool the components in the chassis. If a fault occurs with a cooling fan during system operation, the XSCF detects the error. However, the system can continue operating because the fans have a redundant configuration. 205 Figure 11-1 Location of fan units (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 11.2 Location number Component 1 Fan unit (FANU#0) 2 Fan unit (FANU#1) 3 Fan unit (FANU#2) 4 Fan unit (FANU#3) 5 Fan unit (FANU#4) Before Maintaining a Fan Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan units, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 206 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 11-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 11-1 Types of maintenance for fan unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Supported Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Building block configuration Supported Supported (*2) Supported Supported Supported *1: *2: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 11.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 11-2 shows the maintenance procedure for the fan units. Table 11-2 11.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 11.3 2 Removing a fan unit 11.4 3 Installing a fan unit 11.5 4 Restoring the system 11.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing a fan unit: ■ When replacing multiple fan units, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the fan units cannot be preserved, system-stopped maintenance must be performed. ■ The cooling fans have a redundant configuration. Thus, the system can continue operating even if one of the fans in the fan units fails. Avoid operating the system with a faulty fan for an extended period and replace the fan unit containing the failed fan as soon as possible. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 207 11.3 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a fan unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 11.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 208 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the chassis, in which the fan unit requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 11.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Open the rack door. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 209 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the physical partition requiring maintenance is powered off. XSCF> showpparstatus -a 7. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru For a building-block configuration 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru 210 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "5.1 Command." 11.3.4 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 11.3.5 System-stopped maintenance The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building block configuration and single-chassis configuration. 1. Open the rack door. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 211 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 7. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 11.4 Removing a Fan Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a fan unit. Complete the necessary preparations prior to attempting the removal. For details, see "11.3 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 212 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11.4.1 Accessing a fan unit 1. 11.4.2 Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." Removing a fan unit 1. Pull out the fan unit while raising its lever. Figure 11-2 2. Lever of fan unit Carefully remove the fan unit from its slot. Note - Place the removed fan unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 213 11.5 Installing a Fan Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a fan unit. 11.5.1 Installing a fan unit 1. Carefully insert the fan unit into its slot. Note - Do not force the fan unit into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 2. Push the fan unit fully home. Note - Check that the fan unit is fully inserted and secured. 11.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. 11.6 Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a fan unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ 214 Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the fan unit after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 3. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 4. 11.6.2 Close the rack door. Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Incorporate the chassis, in which the fan unit requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 215 11.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 4. Close the rack door. For a building-block configuration 11.6.4 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 216 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 11.6.5 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 3. 3. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units 217 218 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the internal disks mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. An internal disk can be replaced, expanded, or reduced. ■ Configuration of the Internal Disks 12.1 ■ Before Maintaining an Internal Disk ■ Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk ■ Removing an Internal Disk ■ Installing an Internal Disk ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Internal Disks This section describes the configuration and locations of the internal disks. The chassis provides eight slots for mounting internal disks. The system storage can be expanded by installing extra hard disk drives (HDDs) or solid state drives (SSDs) in these slots. 219 Figure 12-1 Location of internal disks (1) (2) (3) 12.1.1 (4) (5) (6) Location number Component 1 Internal disk (HDD#0) 2 Internal disk (HDD#1) 3 Internal disk (HDD#2) 4 Internal disk (HDD#3) 5 Internal disk (HDD#4) 6 Internal disk (HDD#5) 7 Internal disk (HDD#6) 8 Internal disk (HDD#7) (7) (8) Identification of disk slot To perform active replacement of a disk drive, you need to know the physical device name or logical device name of the drive to be installed or removed. When a disk error is likely to occur or occurs in the system, normally you can check messages regarding a disk that is likely to cause or has caused an error from the system console. This information is recorded also in the /var/adm/messages file. These error messages normally indicate the internal disk drives in which the errors have occurred by their physical or logical device names. In addition, depending on the application, the slot number of the disk may be reported. The procedure to display the mounting position information of the HDD varies 220 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 depending on OS. - For Oracle Solaris 11 For details, see "Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11)" or "Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11)." - For Oracle Solaris 10 For details, see "Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10)." Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11) 1. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the serial number of the CMUL of the chassis for which mounting location information is to be displayed. XSCF> showhardconf SPARC M10-4S; + Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service; + System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off; Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off; Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off; BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:256 GB; CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ; * BB#00 CMUL serial + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 + Memory_Size:128 GB; CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:256 GB; CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ; * BB#01 CMUL serial + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 + Memory_Size:128 GB; CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; MEM#00A Status:Normal; + Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F; + Type:04; Size:8 GB; ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- 2. ; ; Execute the format command to confirm the physical disk slot. Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 221 In the following example, (1) to (5) indicate the following: (1): The logical path name of the disk. (2): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#01. (3): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#01. (4): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#00. (5): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#00. # format Searching for disks...done AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS: 0. c2t50000394281B5312d0<-- (1) /pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b5312,0 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk <-- (2) (*1) 1. c2t50000394281B59D6d0 <-- (1) /pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b59d6,0 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk <-- (3) 2. c0t500003942823C8C6d0 <-- (1) /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w500003942823c8c6,0 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk <-- (4) (*2) 3. c0t50000394281B517Ad0 <-- (1) /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b517a,0 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk <-- (5) Specify disk (enter its number): sec sec sec sec *1: The last four digits of the BB#1_CMUL serial number *2: The last four digits of the BB#0_CMUL serial number Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11) 1. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the CMUL serial number of the chassis that indicates the mounting position information. XSCF> showhardconf SPARC M10-4S; + Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service; + System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off; Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off; Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off; BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:256 GB; CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ; 222 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 * BB#00 CMUL serial + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 + Memory_Size:128 GB; CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011; + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1 ; + Power_Supply_System: ; + Memory_Size:256 GB; CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ; * BB#01 CMUL serial + FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3 /7060911 + Memory_Size:128 GB; CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030; + Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10; + Core:16; Strand:2; MEM#00A Status:Normal; + Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F; + Type:04; Size:8 GB; ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- 2. ; ; Execute the diskinfo(1M) command to check the physical disk slot. (1) to (4) in the example below specify the following: (1): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD0 of BB#01. (2): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD1 of BB#01. (3): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD0 of BB#00. (4): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD1 of BB#00. # diskinfo D:devchassis-path ----------------------------------------------------------/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD0 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD1 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD2 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD3 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD4 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD5 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD6 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD7 Chapter 12 c:occupant-compdev ------------------ Maintaining the Internal Disks 223 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD0 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD1 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD2 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD3 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD4 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD5 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD6 /dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD7 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk c4t50000394281B5312d0 <-- (1) (*1) /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk c4t50000394281B59D6d0 <-- (2) /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD02 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD03 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD04 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD05 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD06 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD07 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk c2t500003942823C8C6d0 <-- (3) (*2) /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk c2t50000394281B517Ad0 <-- (4) /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD02 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD03 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD04 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD05 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD06 /dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD07 - - - *1: The last four digits of the BB#01_CMUL serial number *2: The last four digits of the BB#00_CMUL serial number Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10) 1. Execute the diskinfo command to check the physical disk slot and physical system board. (1) to (4) in the example below specify the following: (1): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD0. (2): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD0 of LSB#0. (3): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD1. (4): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD1 of LSB#0. # diskinfo -ap Enclosure path: Chassis Serial Number: Chassis Model: 2081210007-physical-hba-0 2081210007-physical-hba-0 ORCL,SPARC64-X Enclosure path: Chassis Serial Number: Chassis Model: /dev/es/ses0 500000e0e06d233f FUJITSU-BBEXP 224 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Label Disk name Vendor Product Vers -------- ---------------------- -------- -------------- ---HDD_0 c0t50000393D8289180d0 TOSHIBA MBF2600RC 3706 <-- (1) Physical path -------------------------------0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D8289180,0<--(2) * LSB#0 HDD_1 c0t50000393D82891D0d0 TOSHIBA MBF2600RC 3706 <-- (3) Physical path -------------------------------0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D82891D0,0<--(4) * LSB#0 Device paths differ depending on the system configuration. Table 12-1 lists examples of the device paths of logical system boards in SPARC M10 systems. This table can be used for mapping of the device paths of internal disk drives and the logical system board numbers. The letters "WWN" in the table represents the WWN assigned to the disk. Table 12-1 Disk slot number LSB number Device path LSB#0 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#1 /pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#2 /pci@9000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#3 /pci@9800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#4 /pci@a000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#5 /pci@a800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#6 /pci@b000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#7 /pci@b800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#8 /pci@c000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#9 /pci@c800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#10 /pci@d000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#11 /pci@d800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#12 /pci@e000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#13 /pci@e800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#14 /pci@f000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 LSB#15 /pci@f800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0 2. Execute the showboards command to confirm the BB-ID of the chassis in which the disk requiring maintenance is mounted. Identify the BB-ID from the LSB number confirmed in step 1. The BB-ID of the Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 225 chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number. XSCF> showboards -a PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) ---- -----------00-0 00(00) * BB#0 * LSB#0 01-0 00(01) 12.2 Assignment ----------Assigned Pwr ---y Conn ---y Conf ---y Test ------Passed Fault -------Normal Assigned y y y Passed Normal Before Maintaining an Internal Disk This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the internal disks, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 12.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 12-2 lists the types of maintenance for the internal disks. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 12-2 Types of maintenance for internal disk Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported Supported Building block configuration Supported (*2) Supported (*3) Supported Supported Supported *1: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. *2: Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration (RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance can be performed. *3: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 12.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 12-3 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the internal disks. The procedure for expanding an internal disk is the same as that for installing an internal disk. The procedure for reducing an internal disk is the same as that for removing an internal disk. 226 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 12-3 12.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement Expansion Reduction 1 Preparation 12.3 12.3 12.3 2 Removing an internal disk 12.4 - 12.4 3 Installing an internal disk 12.5 12.5 - 4 Restoring the system 12.6 12.6 12.6 Precautions for installation Note the following points when expanding internal disks: ■ To expand an internal disk, remove the hard disk drive filler unit from the slot in which you will install the internal disk. ■ 12.2.4 Store the removed internal disk filler unit safely, such that it can be used again if you subsequently reduce the internal disk. Precautions for removal Note the following points when removing internal disks: ■ When you reduce the internal disk, install the hard disk drive filler unit in the slot from which you have removed the internal disk. 12.3 Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing an internal disk. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 227 Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 12.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance Note - Unless the system has a redundant configuration, data on the hard disk drive will be lost. Thus, perform this operation only after backing up the data on the hard disk drive. In addition, active/hot maintenance of the boot device cannot be performed in a non-redundant configuration. Before performing maintenance, check the hardware configuration and software configuration. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." The procedure may vary depending on the configuration of the hard disk drive. When the system is configured with a hardware RAID Proceed only after checking the failed hard disk drive. For details, see "14.2.8 Checking the disk drive status" and "14.2.9 Checking for a failed disk drive" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. When the system is configured with a software RAID See your software manual. When the system is configured without either a hardware RAID or software RAID To add an internal disk, perform the procedure up to step 2. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Display the Oracle Solaris super-user prompt. 3. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to check the configuration of the internal disk. If you replace or reduce an internal disk, use the cfgadm -a command to check the Ap_ID of the disk requiring maintenance and make a note of it. The Ap_ID refers to a string such as "c4::dsk/c4t5000039428298FFEd0". If you install an internal disk, use the cfgadm -a command to check the number of disks mounted. # cfgadm -a 228 4. Stop all applications from using the internal disk. 5. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to release the internal disk requiring maintenance from the system. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 # cfgadm -c unconfigure Ap_ID 6. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to blink the CHECK LED of the internal disk requiring maintenance, and determine its location. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -x led=fault,mode=blink Ap_ID 7. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to confirm that the internal disk requiring maintenance is disconnected. The disconnected internal disk is displayed as "unconfigured." # cfgadm -a 12.3.2 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the chassis, in which the internal disk requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 229 7. Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 12.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." For a building-block configuration 12.3.4 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 230 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 12.3.5 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 4. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 5. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 5. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 12.4 Removing an Internal Disk This section describes the procedure for removing an internal disk. Perform reduction using the same procedure. Make the internal disk ready for removal before attempting to remove it. For details, see "12.3 Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 231 12.4.1 Accessing an internal disk 1. 12.4.2 Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." Removing an internal disk 1. Push the knob on the internal disk to unlock it and then raise the lever to a 45-degree angle. Figure 12-2 2. Knob on internal disk Hold the lever and pull out the internal disk by about 3 cm (1.2 in.) Note - When performing active/hot maintenance, at this point wait until the motor stops rotating (about 1 minute). 232 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 12-3 3. Removing an internal disk Carefully remove the internal disk from its slot. Note - Place the removed internal disk on the grounded antistatic ESD mat. 4. 12.5 When reducing an internal disk, install the the internal disk filler unit in the slot from which the disk was removed. Installing an Internal Disk This section describes the procedure for installing an internal disk. Perform expansion using the same procedure. 12.5.1 Installing an internal disk 1. When expanding an internal disk, remove the internal disk filler unit from the slot in which the disk is to be installed. Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 233 2. With the lever opened, hold the internal disk. 3. Carefully insert the internal disk into the slot. Note - Do not force the internal disk into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 4. Close the lever to secure the internal disk. Note - Ensure that the internal disks are firmly inserted and secured. 12.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. 12.6 Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedures for restoring the system after replacement, addition, and removal of internal disks. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 12.6.1 ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance The procedure may vary depending on the configuration of the hard disk drive. When the system is configured with a hardware RAID The operation varies depending on the hardware RAID configuration (RAID 0, RAID 1, or RAID 1E). For details, see "14.2.9 Checking for a failed disk drive" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. 234 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 When the system is configured with a software RAID See your software manual. When the system is configured without either a hardware RAID or software RAID To replace or remove an internal disk, perform the procedure from step 2. 1. Return to the operation of the cfgadm(1M) command of Oracle Solaris super-user prompt and confirm that the number of internal disks has increased. If you installed an internal disk, make note of the Ap_ID of the added disk. The Ap_ID refers to a string such as "c4::dsk/c4t5000039428298FFEd0". If you replaced or reduced an internal disk, you do not have to perform this step. # cfgadm -a 2. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to incorporate the internal disk requiring maintenance into Oracle Solaris. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -c configure Ap_ID 3. Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to confirm that the internal disk requiring maintenance has been incorporated. The incorporated internal disk is displayed as "configured." # cfgadm -a 4. 12.6.2 Close the rack door. Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 235 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring maintenance is normally recognized. When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0 During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot PROM is executed, and the result is displayed. 12.6.3 4. Incorporate the chassis, in which the internal disk requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 5. Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance For a single-chassis configuration 1. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 2. Close the rack door. For a building-block configuration 12.6.4 1. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 2. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. 236 Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring maintenance is normally recognized. When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0 During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot PROM is executed, and the result is displayed. 12.6.5 4. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 5. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 3. 3. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring maintenance is normally recognized. When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. Chapter 12 Maintaining the Internal Disks 237 XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0 During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot PROM is executed, and the result is displayed. 238 4. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 5. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining a PCI Express (PCIe) card mounted in a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. A PCIe card can be replaced, expanded, and reduced. ■ Configuration of the PCI Express Cards 13.1 ■ Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card ■ Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used ■ Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card ■ Removing a PCI Express Card ■ Installing a PCI Express Card ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the PCI Express Cards This section describes the configuration and locations of the PCIe cards. Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit. Up to 11 PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4 without a crossbar unit. 239 Figure 13-1 Location of the PCIe card (1) (2) (3)(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Location number Component 1 PCIe card (PCI#0) 2 PCIe card (PCI#1) 3 PCIe card (PCI#2) 4 PCIe card (PCI#3) 5 PCIe card (PCI#4) 6 PCIe card (PCI#5) 7 PCIe card (PCI#6) 8 PCIe card (PCI#7) 9 PCIe card (PCI#8) (*) 10 PCIe card (PCI#9) (*) 11 PCIe card (PCI#10) (*) (9) (10) (11) *: Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4. 240 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 13.2 Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the PCIe cards, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 13.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 13-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PCIe cards. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." The PCIe cards can be removed/installed while the input power to the chassis is on (power cord is connected). This section explains how to perform all types of maintenance work while the power cord of the chassis remains connected. Table 13-1 Types of maintenance for PCIe cards Configuration Active/hot (with PHP) Active/hot (with DR) Inactive/hot System stopped Single-chassis configuration Supported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*3) Supported Building block configuration Supported (*1) Supported (*2) Supported Supported *1: *2: *3: Perform maintenance work using PCI hot plug (PHP). See "13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used" to check whether PHP can be used. If SE0X7SA2F (an SAS card) is used, PCIe card release using PHP may fail. If the release fails, perform inactive replacement. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for the physical partition to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. For a single-chassis configuration, system-stopped maintenance should be performed. 13.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 13-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for PCIe cards. The procedure for expanding a PCIe card is the same as that for installing a PCIe card. The procedure for reducing a PCIe card is the same as that for removing a PCIe card. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 241 Table 13-2 13.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement Expansion Reduction 1 Pre-check 13.3 13.3 13.3 2 Preparation 13.4 13.4 13.4 3 Removing a PCIe card or the filler for a PCIe card 13.5 13.5 13.5 4 Installing a PCIe card or the filler for a PCIe card 13.6 13.6 13.6 5 Restoring the system 13.7 13.7 13.7 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing PCIe cards. For active maintenance by PHP, a multipath setting is necessary depending on the use of the PCIe cards. ■ 13.2.4 Precautions for installation Note the following points when performing PCIe card expansion. Set a multipath depending on the use of the PCIe card when performing active/hot maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP. ■ ■ ■ 13.2.5 If you are performing PCIe card expansion, remove the filler for the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. Keep the removed filler because it will be needed if PCIe card reduction is subsequently done. Precautions for removal Note the following points when removing PCIe cards. Set a multipath depending on the use of the PCIe card when performing active/hot maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP. ■ ■ 242 If you are removing a PCIe card, attach the filler for the PCIe card after removing the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used PHP enables you to perform maintenance for the PCIe cards while Oracle Solaris is operating. This section checks whether the PCIe card requiring maintenance can use PHP. 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the showlogs command to identify the PCIe card requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 3. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 4. Check whether the PCIe card requiring maintenance supports PHP. The following PCIe cards do not support PHP: [FCoE] SP1X7FAR2F, SP1X7FAS2F, SP1X7FBR2F, and SP1X7FBS2F [IB] SE1X7BA12F and 7104073 (7104074) If the PCIe card requiring maintenance does not support PHP or if you do not use PHP, you do not have to perform step 5 and the subsequent step. 5. # ldm list-io -l NAME ---PCIE0 [pci@8000] PCIE1 [pci@8100] PCIE2 [pci@8200] PCIE3 [pci@8300] PCIE4 [pci@8400] PCIE5 [pci@8500] PCIE6 [pci@8600] PCIE7 If the PCIe card requiring maintenance supports PHP, execute the ldm list-io -l command to confirm the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned and the logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs to is assigned. TYPE ---BUS BUS --PCIE0 DOMAIN -----primary BUS PCIE1 primary BUS PCIE2 primary BUS PCIE3 rootdom BUS PCIE4 primary BUS PCIE5 primary BUS PCIE6 rootdom BUS PCIE7 primary Chapter 13 STATUS ------ <--(*1) IOV <--(*2) <--(*3) IOV IOV <--(*4) IOV Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 243 [pci@8700] /BB0/CMUL/NET0 PCIE [pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9] network@0 network@0,1 /BB0/CMUL/SASHBA PCIE [pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0] scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393a82368b2,0 scsi@0/iport@f/smp@w500000e0e06d03bf scsi@0/iport@f/enclosure@w500000e0e06d03bd,0 scsi@0/iport@v0 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE [pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0] /BB0/PCI3 PCIE [pci@8200/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0] /BB0/PCI4 PCIE [pci@8200/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8] /BB0/PCI7 PCIE [pci@8300/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0] /BB0/PCI8 PCIE [pci@8300/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8] /BB0/CMUL/NET2 PCIE [pci@8400/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a] network@0 network@0,1 /BB0/PCI1 PCIE [pci@8500/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8] /BB0/PCI2 PCIE [pci@8500/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9] /BB0/PCI5 PCIE [pci@8600/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9] /BB0/PCI6 PCIE [pci@8600/pci@4/pci@0/pci@11] /BB0/PCI9 PCIE [pci@8700/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9] /BB0/PCI10 PCIE [pci@8700/pci@4/pci@0/pci@11] PCIE0 primary OCC PCIE0 primary OCC PCIE1 primary PCIE2 primary PCIE2 iodom1 PCIE3 rootdom PCIE3 rootdom PCIE4 primary OCC PCIE5 rootdom EMP PCIE5 rootdom OCC PCIE6 iodom2 PCIE6 rootdom OCC PCIE7 primary OCC PCIE7 primary OCC OCC <--(*5) EMP OCC <--(*6) EMP EMP OCC <--(*7) <--(*8) - Logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned The name shown under [DOMAIN] (of the row containing "/BBx/PCIx" under [NAME]) for the slot of the PCIe card requiring maintenance represents the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned. (*5 to *8 in the execution example) *5: /BB0/PCI0 is assigned to primary, and PCIE1 is also assigned to primary. *6: /BB0/PCI4 is assigned to iodom1, and PCIE2 is assigned to primary. *7: /BB0/PCI8 is assigned to rootdom, and PCIE3 is also assigned to rootdom. *8: /BB0/PCI5 is assigned to iodom2, and PCIE6 is assigned to rootdom. - Logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs to is assigned The name "PCIEx" shown under [BUS] of the row described above is the name of the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs to. The name shown under [DOMAIN] (of the row containing "PCIEx" under [NAME]) for the same PCIe root complex represents the logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the 244 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 PCIe card belongs to is assigned. (*1 to *4 in the execution example) *1: PCIE1 is assigned to primary. *2: PCIE2 is assigned to primary. *3: PCIE3 is assigned to rootdom. *4: PCIE6 is assigned to rootdom. 6. Determine whether PHP can be used, combining the two pieces of information described above based on the confirmation results obtained in step 5. - Suppose that both of the logical domains to which the PCIe slot and the PCIe root complex are assigned are found to be a control domain (primary). In this case, active/hot maintenance can be performed using PHP from the control domain. (*5 in Figure 13-2) - Suppose that both of the logical domains to which the PCIe slot and the PCIe root complex are assigned are found not to be a control domain but the same logical domain (root domain). In this case, active/hot maintenance can be performed using PHP from the root domain. (*7 in Figure 13-2) - In cases other than the above (those where the domains are found to be I/O domains), PHP cannot be used. Thus, see Table 13-4 for an appropriate maintenance procedure. (*6 and *8 in Figure 13-2) Figure 13-2 *6 Confirming assignment to logical domains *8 *7 *5 Assign a PCIe endpoint device to I/O domain *5 to *8 in the figure correspond to the above ldm list-io -l command execution example. Table 13-3 Whether PHP can be used Root Complex PCIe slot Can PHP be used? Remarks Reference Control domain Control domain Yes See *5 in the example of executing the ldm list-io -l command and *5 in Figure 13-2. "13.4.1 Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)" Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 245 Table 13-3 Whether PHP can be used (continue d) Root Complex PCIe slot Can PHP be used? Remarks Reference Control domain I/O domain No See *6 in the example of executing the ldm list-io -l command and *6 in Figure 13-2. "Table 13-4 Operations when PHP cannot be used or you do not use PHP" Root domain Root domain Yes See *7 in the example of executing the ldm list-io -l command and *7 in Figure 13-2. "13.4.1 Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)" Root domain I/O domain No See *8 in the example of executing the ldm list-io -l command and *8 in Figure 13-2. "Table 13-4 Operations when PHP cannot be used or you do not use PHP" Table 13-4 Operations when PHP cannot be used or you do not use PHP System configuration Operation Reference Building block Use building block configuration DR to release the target chassis from the physical partition (*1). "13.4.2 Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)" Single-chassis configuration Stop the system, and then perform maintenance. "13.4.4 System-stopped maintenance" *1: If you do not use DR, the same procedure as for a single-chassis configuration should be performed. 13.4 Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal of a PCIe card. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) 13.4.1 ■ Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) 1. 246 Open the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2. Connect to the control domain console of the physical partition. 3. Check whether there is any guest domain that is virtually using the PCIe card requiring maintenance. - For Ethernet card a. Execute the ldm list-bindings command from the control domain to check virtual network switch [VSW] information for the physical network interface name ([NET-DEV] value) that is assigned to a virtual network switch. In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the PCIe card is assigned, is specified. # ldm list-bindings rootdom ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VSW NAME MAC NET-DEV ID DEVICE LINKPROP DEFAULT-VLAN-ID PVID ...... vsw0 xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx net4(*1) 0 switch@0 1 PEER MAC PVID VID MTU MAXBW ..... vnet0@guest1(*2) xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 1 1500 1 ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- *1: Physical network interface *2: Virtual network device and guest domain serviced by vsw0 b. Log in to the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned. Then, determine the physical location of the physical network interface above, and check whether it corresponds to the PCIe card requiring maintenance. - For Oracle Solaris 11, execute the dladm show-phys -L command to determine [LOC] (physical location) of the physical network interface corresponding to [NET-DEV] in step a. # dladm show-phys -L LINK DEVICE net0 igb0 net1 igb1 net2 igb2 net3 igb3 net4 ixgbe0 net5 ixgbe1 LOC /BB0/CMUL /BB0/CMUL /BB0/CMUU /BB0/CMUU BB#0-PCI#0 BB#0-PCI#0 <--* - For Oracle Solaris 10, execute the /etc/path_to_inst command to confirm the physical device path, and compare it with the physical device path displayed by the ldm list-io -l command to determine the physical location. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 247 # grep " 0 \"ixgbe"\" /etc/path_to_inst "/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/network@0" 0 "ixgbe" c. If the virtual network switch to which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is assigned is found in steps a and b, see the [PEER] part of the virtual network switch displayed in step a. Confirm the part for the virtual network device and guest domain that use the services of the virtual network switch. The display format is " @ ." - For SAS card or FibreChannel card a. Execute the ldm list-bindings command from the control domain to check virtual disk service [VDS] information for the virtual disk backend ([DEVICE] value) that is assigned to the virtual disk service. For information on the types that can be assigned to a virtual disk backend, see "Virtual Disk Backend" in the Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration Guide. In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the PCIe card is assigned, is specified. # ldm list-bindings rootdom ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VDS NAME VOLUME OPTIONS MPGROUP vds0 vol0 vdisks/vdisk.img (*1) vol1 dsk/rpool/zvdisk1 vol2 cxtxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxdxsx CLIENT VOLUME vdisk1@guest1 vol0 (*2) vdisk2@guest2 vol1 vdisk3@guest3 vol2 ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- DEVICE /export/ /dev/zvol/ /dev/dsk/ *1: Virtual disk backend *2: Virtual disk name and guest domain name to which the backend of vol0 is assigned b. Log in to the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned to identify the physical disk from the backend. Then, identify the PCIe card in use from the physical disk. For details of the procedure, see documents for the software that manages respective file system and volume. For example, suppose that the backend is a file on the ZFS file system. In this case, execute the zfs list command to confirm the ZFS storage pool corresponding to the mount point of the directory in which the file is located. Then, execute zpool status to confirm the physical device path of the PCIe card to which a LU or hard disk is connected. 248 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 If MPxIO performs management, use the mpathadm command to display the device path of the physical hard disk corresponding to a LU. Then, confirm the physical device path of the PCIe card that is connected to the physical hard disk. c. If the virtual disk service to which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is assigned is found in steps a and b, see the [CLIENT] part for the virtual disk service displayed in step a. Confirm the virtual disk and guest domain to which the backend of the virtual disk service is assigned. The display format is " @ ." 4. If there is any guest domain that is virtually using the PCIe card requiring maintenance, delete the virtual device (vnet, vdisk) and the virtual service (vsw, vds). a. Log in to the guest domain to stop the use of the virtual device. If the virtual device is used by the duplication function, release it using the duplication function so as not to use the target virtual device. b. Delete the virtual device and the virtual service using the ldm command from the control domain. If you need to restore the original configuration after performing maintenance on the PCIe card, make a note of the setting information in advance. - For virtual network # ldm remove-vnet # ldm remove-vswitch - For virtual disk # ldm remove-vdisk # ldm remove-vdiskserver 5. If the PCIe card requiring maintenance belongs to the root domain, connect to the console of the root domain. If it belongs to the control domain, operations are performed from the control domain console. Thus, you do not have to perform this step. 6. Execute the svcadm enable command to activate the hotplug service. # svcadm enable hotplug 7. Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm the Ap_ID of the PCIe card requiring maintenance and its status. Confirm the Ap_ID and make a note of it. In the following example, [Receptacle] and [Occupant] contain "connected" and "configured", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is incorporated into the logical domain. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 249 # cfgadm -a Ap_Id BB#0-PCI#0 Type pci-pci/hp 8. Receptacle connected Occupant configured Condition ok Execute the cfgadm -c command to release the PCIe card requiring maintenance from the logical domain. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -c unconfigure Ap_Id 9. Execute the cfgadm -c command to stop the power supply to the PCIe card requiring maintenance. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -c disconnect Ap_Id 10. Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm the status of the PCIe card again. In the following example, [Receptacle] and [Occupant] contain "disconnected" and "unconfigured", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is released from the logical domain. # cfgadm -a Ap_Id BB#0-PCI#0 Type pci-pci/hp Receptacle Occupant Condition disconnected unconfigured ok 11. Execute the cfgadm -x command to cause the ATTENTION LED on the PCIe card cassette requiring maintenance to blink. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -x led=attn,mode=blink Ap_Id 13.4.2 Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) Note - To perform active/hot maintenance without using PHP, use DR of the system board on the physical partition. For information on the versions of XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU that support DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/hot maintenance without using PHP can be performed only for a building block configuration. 250 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3. Release from the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is mounted. a. Referencing step 5 in "13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used," confirm the logical domains to which the PCIe root complex and PCIe slot of the chassis with the maintenance target mounted are assigned. b. Execute the ldm list-bindings command for these logical domains to confirm the name of the guest domain to which the virtual service (vsw, vds) is provided. In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the PCIe card is assigned, is specified. # ldm list-bindings rootdom ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VSW NAME MAC NET-DEV ID DEVICE LINKPROP DEFAULT-VLAN-ID PVID ...... vsw0 xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx net4 0 switch@0 1 PEER MAC PVID VID MTU MAXBW ..... vnet0@guest1(*1) xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 1 1500 ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VDS NAME VOLUME OPTIONS MPGROUP vds0 vol0 vdisks/vdisk.img (*2) vol1 dsk/rpool/zvdisk1 vol2 cxtxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxdxsx CLIENT VOLUME vdisk1@guest1 vol0 (*1) vdisk2@guest2 vol1 (*1) vdisk3@guest3 vol2 (*1) ------------------------Ommitted----------------------- 1 DEVICE /export/ /dev/zvol/ /dev/dsk/ *1: Guest domain that uses the virtual device *2: Virtual disk backend c. If the guest domain that uses the virtual device is found in step b, log in to the guest domain to stop the use of the virtual device. If the virtual device is used by the duplication function, release it using the duplication function so as not to use the target virtual device. d. If the logical domains confirmed in step a are I/O domains, stop the I/O domains and delete the assigned PCIe slot. If you need to restore the original configuration after performing maintenance on the PCIe card, make a note of the deleted PCIe slot and the domain name in advance. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 251 # ldm stop iodomain # ldm remove-io /BB1/PCI0 iodomain e. Release from the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is mounted. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 4. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 13.4.3 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Inactive/Hot maintenance Note - Inactive/hot maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. For a single-chassis configuration, system-stopped maintenance should be performed. 13.4.4 1. Open the rack door. 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." System-stopped maintenance The PCIe cards can be removed/installed while the input power to the chassis is on (power cord is connected). System-stopped maintenance is also described as maintenance performed while the power cord remains connected. 1. Open the rack door. 252 2. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 3. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 13.5 Removing a PCI Express Card This section describes the procedure for removing a PCIe card. Perform reduction using the same procedure. For installation, remove the filler for a PCIe card instead of removing a PCIe card. Enable the removal of the PCIe card before attempting to remove it. For details, see "13.4 Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 13.5.1 Accessing a PCI Express card cassette 1. Lower the cable support. For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support." Note - If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop fastener, remove the hook-and-loop fastener. 2. Remove the cables connected to the PCIe card cassette requiring maintenance. Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette There are two types of PCIe card cassettes. The shapes of the latch (A in the figure) and lever (B in the figure) vary depending on the type of the PCIe card cassette, but the same removal procedure applies. For the types of PCIe card cassettes, see "Figure 13-3." Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use Type-1. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 253 Figure 13-3 Types of PCIe card cassettes Type-1 Type-2 A A B B 1. Lower the lever (B in the figure) of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the latch (A in the figure). Figure 13-4 Lever of PCIe card cassette A 2. 254 B Hold the lever and carefully pull the PCIe card cassette out of the PCI slot to remove it. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Place the removed PCIe card cassette on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Figure 13-5 13.5.3 Removing the PCIe card cassette Removing a PCI Express card 1. Remove the cover while pushing the clip (A in the figure) at the rear of the cover. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 255 Figure 13-6 Clip at rear of cover A 2. Remove the screw securing the PCIe card cassette. Figure 13-7 256 Removing the screw Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3. Remove the bracket (A in the figure) from the PCIe card. Figure 13-8 Removing the bracket A 4. Remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. For installation, you do not have to perform this step. Remove the filler for the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. Note - Do not forcibly remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. If excessive force is used to remove the PCIe card, it may be damaged. Note - Place the removed PCIe card on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 257 Figure 13-9 13.6 Removing the PCIe card Installing a PCI Express Card This section describes the procedure for installing a PCIe card. Perform expansion using the same procedure. When removing a PCIe card, install the filler unit instead of another PCIe card after removing the PCIe card. 13.6.1 Installing a PCI Express card 1. Install the PCIe card by inserting it into the connector of the PCIe card cassette. For removal of a PCIe card, you do not have to perform this step. Attach the filler for the PCIe card to the PCIe card cassette. Note - Confirm that the tab of the PCIe card or the tab of the filler for the PCIe card is inserted in the notch of the PCIe card cassette. 258 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 13-10 2. Installing a PCIe card Install the bracket for the PCIe card, and secure it with the screw. Figure 13-11 Installing the bracket Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 259 3. 13.6.2 Mount the cover on the PCIe card cassette. Installing a PCI Express card cassette Note - When mounting a PCIe card cassette, check the connectors on both of the chassis and PCIe card cassette beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a PCIe card cassette is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or PCIe card cassette may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 1. Hold the lever of the PCIe card cassette, and carefully insert it into the PCIe slot. Note - Slide the PCIe card cassette along the rail at the bottom of the PCIe slot. Note - Do not forcibly push the PCIe card cassette into the PCIe slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 2. Raise the lever of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the latch and secure it. Note - Ensure that the PCIe card cassette is firmly inserted and secured. 13.6.3 Restoring the chassis 1. Connect the cables to the PCIe card cassette. Note - Reinstall the cables of the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 2. 13.7 Lift the cable support to fix it. For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support." Restoring the System This section describes the procedures for restoring the system after replacement, addition, and removal of PCIe cards. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: 260 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 13.7.1 ■ Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) ■ Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP) 1. Display the Oracle Solaris super-user prompt. 2. Execute the cfgadm -c command to start the power supply to the PCIe card requiring maintenance. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -c connect Ap_Id 3. Execute the cfgadm -c command to incorporate the PCIe card requiring maintenance into the logical domain. Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance. # cfgadm -c configure Ap_Id 4. Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring maintenance has been incorporated into the logical domain. In the following example, [Receptacle], [Occupant], and [Condition] contain "connected", "configured", and "ok", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is incorporated into the logical domain. # cfgadm -a Ap_Id Condition BB#0-PCI#0 5. Type Receptacle Occupant pci-pci/hp connected configured ok Execute the svcadm disable command to disable the hotplug service. # svcadm disable hotplug 6. If you deleted the virtual device and the virtual service in "13.4.1 Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)," add them based on the information you made a note of and reassign them to the guest domain. For details on how to add a virtual device and a virtual service, see the Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration Guide. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 261 7. 13.7.2 Close the rack door. Active/Hot maintenance (with DR) 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is recognized. When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0 During the diagnosis processing, the show-devs command of OpenBoot PROM is executed, and the result is displayed. 13.7.3 3. Incorporate into the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is mounted. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 4. Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is recognized. When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0 262 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 13.7.4 System-stopped maintenance 1. Log in to the XSCF shell. 2. Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring maintenance is recognized. When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry. The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0. XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0 During the diagnosis processing, the show-devs command of OpenBoot PROM is executed, and the result is displayed. 3. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards 263 264 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the PSU backplane unit mounted in a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. ■ Location of the PSU Backplane Unit 14.1 ■ Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit ■ Removing the PSU Backplane Unit ■ Installing the PSU Backplane Unit ■ Restoring the System Location of the PSU Backplane Unit This section describes the location of the PSU backplane unit. The PSU backplane unit has connectors for connecting multiple power supply units. Caution - Do not replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit. If you replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit, the system may fail to operate normally. Replace a PSU backplane unit or CPU memory unit, and confirm that the newly installed part is normal by using the showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace the other Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). 265 Figure 14-1 Location of PSU backplane unit (1) 14.2 Location number Component 1 PSU backplane unit (PSUBP) Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the PSU backplane unit. 266 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 14.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 14-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PSU backplane unit. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 14-1 Types of maintenance for PSU backplane unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported *1: *2: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 14.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 14-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the PSU backplane unit. Table 14-2 14.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 14.3 2 Removing the PSU backplane unit 14.4 3 Installing the PSU backplane unit 14.5 4 Restoring the system 14.6 Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit This section describes the preparation that must be completed prior to removing the PSU backplane unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 267 Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 14.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the building block, in which the PSU backplane unit requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. 268 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 14.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 14.3.3 System-stopped maintenance The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building block configuration and single-chassis configuration. Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 269 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 7. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 14.4 Removing the PSU Backplane Unit This section describes the procedure for removing the PSU backplane unit from the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Enable the removal of the PSU backplane unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "14.3 Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 270 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 14.4.1 Accessing the PSU backplane unit 1. Lower the cable support. For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support." 2. Remove all the cables connected to the external interface. The cables to be removed are as follows. ■ Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card ■ Crossbar cable ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable ■ LAN cable Note - Make a note of the positions of the cables connected to the external interface before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 3. Remove all PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 4. Remove all the crossbar units. For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit." Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 6. 5. Loosen the three screws securing the mounting frame of the crossbar unit and then remove the frame. Figure 14-2 Screws securing the mounting frame Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 271 6. Loosen the screw securing the CPU memory unit and then lower the right and left levers to the horizontal position. Figure 14-3 Screw securing the CPU memory unit 7. Pull the CPU memory unit out by about 10 cm (3.9 in.) 8. Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 9. Remove all the power supply units. For details, see "10.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit." Note - Make a note of the positions of the power supply units before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 10. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "11.4 Removing a Fan Unit." Note - Make a note of the locations of the fan units before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 11. Remove all the internal disks or the HDD filler units. For details, see "12.4 Removing an Internal Disk." Note - Make a note of the positions of the internal disks before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 12. Loosen the two screws in the fan slot and then remove the fan shelf. 272 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 14-4 14.4.2 Screws in the fan slot Removing the PSU backplane unit 1. Loosen the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit and then partially pull out the PSU backplane unit. Figure 14-5 2. Screws securing the PSU backplane unit Pull the PSU backplane unit out a little more. Then, remove the unit by holding its handle. Note - Place the removed PSU backplane unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 273 Figure 14-6 3. 14.5 Handle of PSU backplane unit Remove the operation panel. For details, see step 2 and later in "15.4.2 Removing the operation panel." Installing the PSU Backplane Unit This section describes the procedure for installing the PSU backplane unit. 14.5.1 274 Installing the PSU backplane unit 1. Install the operation panel on the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "15.5.1 Installing the operation panel." 2. Insert the PSU backplane unit into the chassis by holding the handle. 3. Tighten the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 14.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. Install the fan shelf and then tighten the two screws in the fan slot. 2. Install all the power supply units. For details, see "10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit." Note - Install the power supply units in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 3. Install all the fan units. For details, see "11.5.1 Installing a fan unit." Note - Reinstall the fan units in their original locations by referring to the notes you made prior to the start of maintenance. 4. Install all the internal disks or HDD filler units. For details, see "12.5 Installing an Internal Disk." Note - Reinstall the internal disks in their original locations by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 5. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." 6. Insert the CPU memory unit in the chassis. 7. Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit and then tighten the one screw. 8. Install the mounting frame for the crossbar unit and then tighten the three screws. Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 10. 9. Install all the crossbar units. For details, see "9.5.1 Installing a crossbar unit." 10. Install all the PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 11. Connect all the cables to the external interface. The cables to be connected are as follows. ■ Interface cable connected to the PCIe card Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 275 ■ Crossbar cable ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable ■ LAN cable Note - Reconnect the cables of the external interface in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 12. Lift the cable support to fix it. For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support." 14.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the PSU backplane unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 14.6.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 276 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." 3. Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 14.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Incorporate the chassis, in which the PSU backplane unit requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 6. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 277 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 14.6.3 Checking log information." 5. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 5. 3. 278 Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 5. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 6. Close the rack door. Chapter 14 Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit 279 280 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the operation panel mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. ■ Location of the Operation Panel 15.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Operation Panel ■ Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel ■ Removing the Operation Panel ■ Installing the Operation Panel ■ Restoring the System Location of the Operation Panel This section describes the location of the operation panel. 281 Figure 15-1 Location of the operation panel (1) 15.2 Location number Component 1 Operation panel (OPNL) Before Maintaining the Operation Panel This section describes the types and flow of the maintenance of the operation panel, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 15.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 15-1 lists the types of maintenance for the operation panel. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 282 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 15-1 Types of maintenance for operation panel Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold (*1) System stopped Single-chassis configuration Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*2) Unsupported Supported Supported *1: *2: For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped maintenance. It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition. 15.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 15-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the operation panel. Table 15-2 15.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 15.3 2 Removing the operation panel 15.4 3 Installing the operation panel 15.5 4 Restoring the system 15.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following point when replacing the operation panel: ■ If you replace the operation panel, set the BB-ID for the new operation panel to the same value as that prior to the start of maintenance. 15.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal of the operation panel. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. ■ Active/Cold maintenance Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 283 ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 15.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Release the chassis, in which the operation panel requiring maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition. For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 284 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 15.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 15.3.3 System-stopped maintenance The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building block configuration and single-chassis configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 285 maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis. Proceed to step 7. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 15.4 Removing the Operation Panel This section describes the procedure for removing the operation panel. Enable the removal of the operation panel before attempting to remove it. For details, see "15.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 286 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 15.4.1 Accessing the operation panel 1. Check the ID switch on the operation panel and record the BB-ID set for the chassis requiring maintenance. 2. Lower the cable support. For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support." 3. Remove all the cables connected to the external interface. The cables to be removed are as follows. ■ Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card ■ Crossbar cable ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable ■ LAN cable Note - Make a note of the positions of the cables connected to the external interface before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 4. Remove all PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 5. Remove all the crossbar units. For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit." Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 7. 6. Loosen the three screws securing the mounting frame of the crossbar unit and then remove the frame. Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 287 Figure 15-2 7. Screws securing the mounting frame Loosen the screw securing the CPU memory unit and lower the right and left levers to the horizontal position. Figure 15-3 Screw securing CPU memory unit 8. Pull out the CPU memory unit by about 10 cm (3.9 in.) 9. Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 10. Pull out the power supply unit by about 10 cm (3.9 in.) For details, see "10.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit." 11. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "11.4 Removing a Fan Unit." 288 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Make a note of the locations of the fan units before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 12. Loosen the two screws in the fan slot and then remove the fan shelf. Figure 15-4 15.4.2 Screws in the fan slot Removing the operation panel 1. Loosen the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit and partially pull out the PSU backplane unit. Figure 15-5 2. Screws securing the PSU backplane unit Remove the cable from the operation panel and loosen one screw (A in the figure). Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 289 Figure 15-6 Cables and screws of the operation panel A 3. Pull the operation panel forward to remove it. Note - Place the removed operation panel on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 15.5 Installing the Operation Panel This section describes the procedure for installing the operation panel. 15.5.1 290 Installing the operation panel 1. Set the BB-ID of the operation panel to the value prior to the start of maintenance. 2. Place the operation panel in the mounting position and then tighten one screw. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 15.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. Connect the cables to the operation panel. 2. Reinstall the PSU backplane unit in its original position and then tighten the two screws. 3. Reinstall the fan shelf and then tighten the two screws in the fan slot. 4. Reinstall the power supply unit in its original position. For details, see "10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit." 5. Install all the fan units. For details, see "11.5.1 Installing a fan unit." Note - Reinstall the fan units in their original positions by referring to the notes you made prior to the start of maintenance. 6. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Note - Check that the front cover is firmly attached and secured. 7. Insert the CPU memory unit into the chassis. 8. Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit and then tighten the one screw. 9. Install the mounting frame for the crossbar unit and then tighten the three screws. Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 11. 10. Install all the crossbar units. For details, see "9.5.1 Installing a crossbar unit." 11. Install all the PCIe card cassettes. For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette." Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 12. Connect all the cables to the external interface. The cables to be connected are as follows. ■ Interface cable connected to the PCIe card ■ Crossbar cable ■ XSCF BB control cable ■ XSCF DUAL control cable Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 291 ■ LAN cable Note - Reconnect the cables of the external interface in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 13. Lift the cable support to fix it. For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support." 15.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the operation panel. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a single-chassis configuration. 15.6.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance. For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see the latest Product Notes. Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 292 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 15.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Incorporate the chassis, in which the operation panel requiring maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition. For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition." 6. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration. The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as that for stopping the system. 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 293 physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 15.6.3 Checking log information." 5. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis. Proceed to step 5. 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 294 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 5. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 6. Close the rack door. Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel 295 296 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar units mounted on the crossbar box. ■ Configuration of the Crossbar Units 16.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit ■ Removing a Crossbar Unit ■ Installing a Crossbar Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Crossbar Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the crossbar units. 297 Figure 16-1 Location of crossbar units (3) (2) (1) 16.2 Location number Component 1 Crossbar unit (XBUX#0) 2 Crossbar unit (XBUX#1) 3 Crossbar unit (XBUX#2) Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the crossbar units. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 16.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 16-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 298 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 16-1 Types of maintenance for the crossbar unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Supported (*1) Unsupported Supported Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition mounted on two or more chassis is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 16.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 16-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar units. Table 16-2 16.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 16.3 2 Removing the crossbar units 16.4 3 Installing the crossbar unit 16.5 4 Restoring the system 16.6 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit This section describes preparation that must be completed prior to removing a crossbar unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 16.3.1 Active/Cold maintenance Note - Confirm that the POWER LED on the crossbar box is off. Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box 299 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 16.3.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 300 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 16.3.3 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 16.4 Removing a Crossbar Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a crossbar unit. Enable the removal of the crossbar box before attempting to remove it. For details, see "16.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit." Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box 301 Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove all crossbar cables (optical) connected to the crossbar unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "25.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)." Note - Make a note of the positions of the crossbar cables (optical) before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 2. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) on the right and left sides and lower the levers to release the crossbar unit. Figure 16-2 Positions of screws and levers A A 3. 302 Hold the levers and partially pull out the crossbar unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 16-3 4. Pulling out crossbar unit Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and remove it carefully. Note - Place the removed crossbar unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 16.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a crossbar unit. Note - When mounting a crossbar unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and crossbar unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a crossbar unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or crossbar unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 1. Carefully insert the crossbar unit into the chassis. 2. Close the right and left levers of the crossbar unit and tighten two screws. Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box 303 3. Connect all crossbar cables (optical) to the crossbar unit. For details, see "25.5 Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)." Note - Reinstall the crossbar cables (optical) in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. 16.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the crossbar units. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance 16.6.1 ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 304 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 16.6.2 Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 16.6.3 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the crossbar unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box 305 Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 306 Checking log information." 5. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF unit mounted in the crossbar box. ■ Location of the XSCF Unit 17.1 ■ Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit ■ Removing the XSCF Unit ■ Installing the XSCF Unit ■ Restoring the System Location of the XSCF Unit This section describes the location of the XSCF unit. 307 Figure 17-1 Location of XSCF unit (1) 17.2 Location number Component 1 XSCF unit (XSCFU) Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the XSCF unit. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 17.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 17-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF unit. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 308 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 17-1 Type of maintenance for XSCF unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Supported (*1) Unsupported (*2) Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) *1: *2: *3: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby XSCF. If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 17.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 17-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF unit. Table 17-2 17.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 17.3 2 Removing an XSCF unit 17.4 3 Installing an XSCF unit 17.5 4 Restoring the system 17.6 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing an XSCF unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box 309 17.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby XSCF. Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master chassis. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 17.3.2 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 310 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Stop the physical partition requiring maintenance. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 17.3.3 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box 311 17.4 Removing the XSCF Unit This section describes the procedure for removing the XSCF unit. Enable the removal of the XSCF unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "17.3 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove all the cables connected to the maintenance-target XSCF unit. The cables to be removed are as follows. ■ Serial cable ■ LAN cable ■ USB device Note - The cables connected to the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the right cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the cables, first remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support. Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 2. 312 Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) of the XSCF unit and lower the right and left levers to release the XSCF unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 17-2 Positions of screws and levers A 3. Hold the levers and partially pull out the XSCF unit. Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box 313 Figure 17-3 4. Pulling out the XSCF unit Support the XSCF unit from below with one hand and then remove it carefully. Note - Place the removed XSCF unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 17.5 Installing the XSCF Unit This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF unit. Note - When mounting a XSCF unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and XSCF unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If an XSCF unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or XSCF unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 314 1. Carefully insert the XSCF unit into the chassis. 2. Raise the right and left levers and then tighten the two screws. 3. Reconnect all the cables to the XSCF unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 The cables to be reconnected are as follows. ■ Serial cable ■ LAN cable ■ USB device Note - Reinstall the cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance. Note - After connecting the cables, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle and fix the cables to the cable support at the rear. 17.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance 17.6.1 ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance 1. Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on. For the location of LEDs, see "2.3.3 LEDs on each component." 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the switchscf command to switch the standby XSCF to the master XSCF. Execute the command if the chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to the standby XSCF. XSCF> switchscf -t Active 4. 17.6.2 Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm Chapter 17 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box 315 that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 17.6.3 2. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 3. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 316 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Start all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the power supply units mounted in a crossbar box. ■ Configuration of the Power Supply Units 18.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit ■ Removing a Power Supply Unit ■ Installing a Power Supply Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Power Supply Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the power supply units. The power supply units can have the 1+1 redundant configuration. Active/hot maintenance can be performed. 317 Figure 18-1 Locations of power supply units (1) (2) 18.2 Location number Component 1 Power supply unit (PSU#0) 2 Power supply unit (PSU#1) Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the power supply units, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 18.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 18-1 lists the types of maintenance for the power supply units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 318 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 18-1 Types of maintenance for the power supply unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Supported (*1) Unsupported (*2) Supported Unsupported (*2) Supported (*3) *1: *2: *3: Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration. If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 18.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 18-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the power supply units. Table 18-2 18.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 18.3 2 Removing a power supply unit 18.4 3 Installing a power supply unit 18.5 4 Restoring the system 18.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing a power supply unit: ■ There are two power supply units. Thus, the system can continue operating even if one of the units fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended period while one unit has failed. ■ ■ 18.3 When replacing multiple power supply units, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the power supply unit cannot be assured, then system-stopped maintenance must be performed. Do not force push the power supply unit into its slot. If excessive force is applied, other components or the chassis may be damaged. Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 319 of a power supply unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 18.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance Note - Active/hot maintenance is supported only for a redundant configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 6. 18.3.2 320 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. 18.3.3 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 321 requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 18.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a power supply unit. Enable the removal of the power supply unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "18.3 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. 322 While pushing the lever (A in the figure) of the power supply unit, hold the handle (B in the figure) and pull out the power supply unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 18-2 B 2. Removing a power supply unit A Support the power supply unit with one hand from below and carefully pull it out of the slot. Note - Place the removed power supply unit on the grounded ESD mat to ground any static electricity. 18.5 Installing a Power Supply Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a power supply unit. 1. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and insert it carefully into its slot. Note - Do not forcibly push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 2. Push the power supply unit fully home. Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 323 Note - Check that the power supply unit is fully inserted and that the lever is fixed. 18.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a power supply unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance 18.6.1 ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance 1. Connect the power cords to the power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." 2. Confirm that the LED (green) of the power supply unit is on. 3. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 4. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the power supply unit is operating normally after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 5. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 6. 18.6.2 324 Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Connect the power cords to the power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." 2. Confirm that the LED (green) of the power supply unit is on. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 18.6.3 3. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 4. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 5. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 325 326 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan units mounted in a crossbar box. ■ Configuration of the Fan Units 19.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Fan Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit ■ Removing a Fan Unit ■ Installing a Fan Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Fan Units This section describes the configuration and the locations of the fan units. Four fan units are mounted in each chassis. If one of the cooling fans fails during system operation, the XSCF detects the error. However, the system can continue operating because the fans have a redundant configuration. 327 Figure 19-1 Location of fan units (1) (2) (3) (4) 19.2 Location number Component 1 Fan unit (FANU#0) 2 Fan unit (FANU#1) 3 Fan unit (FANU#2) 4 Fan unit (FANU#3) Before Maintaining a Fan Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan units, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 328 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 19.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 19-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan units. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 19-1 Types of maintenance for fan unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Supported Unsupported (*1) Supported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 19.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 19-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the fan units. Table 19-2 19.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 19.3 2 Removing a fan unit 19.4 3 Installing a fan unit 19.5 4 Restoring the system 19.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing a fan unit: ■ When replacing multiple fan units, replace one unit at a time. If a redundant configuration cannot be assured, perform cold replacement. ■ 19.3 The cooling fans have a redundant configuration. Thus, the system can continue operating even if one of the fans in the fan units experiences a failure. Avoid operating the system with a faulty fan for an extended period and replace the fan unit containing the failed fan as soon as possible. Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box 329 fan unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 19.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 19.3.2 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 330 Checking log information." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 19.3.3 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box 331 19.4 Removing a Fan Unit This section describes the procedure for removing a fan unit. Enable the removal of the fan unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "19.3 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 19.4.1 Accessing a fan unit 1. 19.4.2 Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." Removing a fan unit 1. Pull out the fan unit while raising the lever (A in the figure) of the fan unit. Figure 19-2 Lever of fan unit A 2. 332 Carefully remove the fan unit from its slot. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Note - Place the removed fan unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 19.5 Installing a Fan Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a fan unit. 19.5.1 Installing a fan unit 1. Carefully insert the fan unit into its slot. Note - Do not force the fan unit into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the component or the chassis. 2. Push the fan unit fully home. Note - Check that the fan unit is fully inserted and secured. 19.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. 19.6 Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a fan unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box 333 19.6.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with the fan unit after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 3. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 4. 19.6.2 19.6.3 Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 3. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 334 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box 335 336 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 20 Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF interface unit mounted in a crossbar box. ■ Location of the XSCF Interface Unit 20.1 ■ Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit ■ Removing the XSCF Interface Unit ■ Installing the XSCF Interface Unit ■ Restoring the System Location of the XSCF Interface Unit This section describes the location of the XSCF interface unit. 337 Figure 20-1 Location of XSCF interface unit (1) 20.2 Location number Component 1 XSCF interface unit (XSCFIFU) Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the XSCF interface unit. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 20.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 20-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF interface unit. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 338 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 20-1 Type of maintenance for XSCF interface unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 20.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 20-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF interface unit. Table 20-2 20.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 20.3 2 Removing an XSCF interface unit 20.4 3 Installing an XSCF interface unit 20.5 4 Restoring the system 20.6 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the XSCF interface unit. Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Chapter 20 Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box 339 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 20.4 Removing the XSCF Interface Unit This section describes the procedure for removing an XSCF interface unit. Enable the removal of the XSCF interface unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "20.3 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove all the XSCF BB control cables and XSCF DUAL control cables connected to the XSCF interface unit. Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 2. 340 Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) of the XSCF interface unit and lower the right and left levers to release the XSCF interface unit. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 20-2 Positions of screws and levers A 3. Hold the levers and partially pull out the XSCF interface unit. Figure 20-3 4. Pulling out the XSCF interface unit Support the XSCF interface unit from below with one hand and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Chapter 20 Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box 341 Note - Place the removed XSCF interface unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 20.5 Installing the XSCF Interface Unit This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF interface unit. Note - When mounting an XSCF interface unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and XSCF interface unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If an XSCF interface unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the chassis or XSCF interface unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent. 1. Support the XSCF interface unit from below with one hand and then carefully insert it into the chassis. 2. Raise the right and left levers and tighten the two screws. 3. Connect all the cables to the XSCF interface unit. Note - Reinstall the cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made before the start of maintenance. Note - Ensure that the cables are firmly connected and secured. 20.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing an XSCF interface unit. 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 342 2. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 3. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar backplane unit mounted in a crossbar box. ■ Location of the Crossbar Backplane Unit 21.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit ■ Removing the Crossbar Backplane Unit ■ Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit ■ Restoring the System Location of the Crossbar Backplane Unit This section describes the location of the crossbar backplane unit. 343 Figure 21-1 Location of crossbar backplane unit (1) 21.2 Location number Component 1 Crossbar backplane unit (XBBPU) Before Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the crossbar backplane unit. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 21.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 21-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar backplane unit. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 344 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 21-1 Types of maintenance for crossbar backplane unit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 21.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 21-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar backplane unit. Table 21-2 21.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 21.3 2 Removing the crossbar backplane unit 21.4 3 Installing the crossbar backplane unit 21.5 4 Restoring the system 21.6 Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the crossbar backplane unit. Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 345 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar backplane unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 21.4 Removing the Crossbar Backplane Unit This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar backplane unit. Enable the removal of the crossbar backplane unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "21.3 Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Partially pull out the following components, in order, from top to bottom. You do not have to remove the cables of these components. - XSCF unit For details, see "17.4 Removing the XSCF Unit." - XSCF interface unit For details, see "20.4 Removing the XSCF Interface Unit." - Crossbar unit or crossbar filler unit For details, see "16.4 Removing a Crossbar Unit." - Power supply unit For details, see "18.4 346 Removing a Power Supply Unit." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2. Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 3. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit." 4. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper cover (C in the figure). Figure 21-2 B A 5. Removing the upper cover C B A Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then slide the lower cover to the left to remove it. Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 347 Figure 21-3 Removing the lower cover A 6. Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf. Arrange the removed cables in the center. Figure 21-4 7. 348 Removing the cables Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan shelf. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 21-5 8. Removing the fan shelf Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the center. Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 9. Loosen the two screws and remove the bracket (B in the figure) fixing the guide plate (A in the figure). Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 349 Figure 21-6 Removing the bracket B A 10. Slide the guide plate (A in the figure) to the front to remove it. 350 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 21-7 Removing guide plate A 11. Remove the cable from the clamps. Note - Move the clamps back to their original positions so that they do not foul the removal of the crossbar backplane unit. Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 351 Figure 21-8 Removing the cables 12. Loosen the five screws securing the crossbar backplane unit and then pull the crossbar backplane unit straight out by holding the center handle (A in the figure). Note - Remove the unit carefully so as to not damage any cables. Note - Place the removed crossbar backplane unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 352 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 21-9 Removing the crossbar backplane unit A 21.5 Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit This section describes the procedure for installing the crossbar backplane unit. 1. Insert the crossbar backplane unit into the chassis and then tighten the five screws. 2. Fix the cables of the crossbar backplane unit with the clamps. 3. Install the guide plate by sliding it towards the rear and then tighten the two screws. Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 353 Check the guide plate latch to ensure that the plate is securely installed. 4. Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully into the chassis. Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf. 5. Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf. 6. Connect the two cables to the fan shelf. 7. Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw. 8. Install the upper cover. 9. Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure the cover with the two screws. 10. Install all the fan units. For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit." 11. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." 12. Reinstall the following components in their original positions in the order shown. - Power supply unit For details, see "18.5 Installing a Power Supply Unit." - Crossbar unit or crossbar filler unit For details, see "16.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit." 21.6 - XSCF interface unit For details, see "20.5 Installing the XSCF Interface Unit." - XSCF unit For details, see "17.5 Installing the XSCF Unit." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a crossbar backplane unit. 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 354 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the crossbar backplane unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. - When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the incorporated physical partition is powered off: The example below specifies the following: 00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: The BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify more than one of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 - When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on: The example below specifies the following: 00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: The PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 5. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box 355 356 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan backplane mounted in the crossbar box. ■ Configuration of the Fan Backplane 22.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane ■ Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane ■ Removing the Fan Backplane ■ Installing the Fan Backplane ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Fan Backplane This section describes the configuration and the location of the fan backplane. The fan units are interconnected through the fan backplane. 357 Figure 22-1 Location of fan backplane (1) 22.2 Location number Component 1 Fan backplane (FANBP) Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan backplane. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 358 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 22.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 22-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan backplane. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 22-1 Types of maintenance for fan backplane Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All of the physical partitions must be stopped, and the system must be completely shut down. 22.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 22-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the fan backplane. Table 22-2 22.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 22.3 2 Removing the fan backplane 22.4 3 Installing the fan backplane 22.5 4 Restoring the system 22.6 Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the fan backplane. Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box 359 maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the fan backplane requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 22.4 Removing the Fan Backplane This section describes the procedure for removing the fan backplane. Enable the removal of the fan backplane before attempting to remove it. For details, see "22.3 Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 22.4.1 Accessing the fan backplane 1. 360 Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2. 22.4.2 Remove all the fan units. For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit." Removing the fan backplane 1. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper cover (C in the figure). Figure 22-2 Removing the upper cover B C A 2. B A Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then slide the lower cover to the left to remove it. Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box 361 Figure 22-3 Removing the lower cover A 3. Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf. Arrange the removed cables in the center. Figure 22-4 4. 362 Removing the cables Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan shelf. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 22-5 5. Removing the fan shelf Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the center. Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 6. Disconnect the two cables from the fan backplane. Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box 363 Figure 22-6 7. 364 Removing the cables Remove the two screws securing the fan backplane to remove the bracket (A in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 22-7 Removing the screws and bracket A 8. Remove the fan backplane. Note - Place the removed fan backplane on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 22.5 Installing the Fan Backplane This section describes the procedure for installing the fan backplane. 22.5.1 Installing the fan backplane 1. Fit the fan backplane into the right- and left-hand notches in the fan shelf. 2. Install the bracket of the fan backplane and secure it with two screws. 3. Connect the two cables to the fan backplane. 4. Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully into the chassis. Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf. 5. Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf. Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box 365 22.5.2 22.6 6. Connect the two cables to the fan shelf. 7. Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw. 8. Install the upper cover. 9. Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure the cover with the two screws. Restoring the chassis 1. Install all the fan units. For details, see "19.5.1 Installing a fan unit." 2. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the fan backplane. 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 366 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the fan backplane has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the operation panel mounted on the crossbar box. ■ Location of the Operation Panel 23.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Operation Panel ■ Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel ■ Removing the Operation Panel ■ Installing the Operation Panel ■ Restoring the System Location of the Operation Panel This section describes the location of the operation panel. 367 Figure 23-1 Location of the operation panel (1) 23.2 Location number Component 1 Operation panel (OPNL) Before Maintaining the Operation Panel This section describes the types and flow of the maintenance of the operation panel, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 23.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 23-1 lists the types of maintenance for the operation panel. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." 368 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table 23-1 Types of maintenance for operation panel Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: *2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 23.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 23-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the operation panel. Table 23-2 23.2.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 23.3 2 Removing the operation panel 23.4 3 Installing the operation panel 23.5 4 Restoring the system 23.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following point when replacing the operation panel: ■ If you replace the operation panel, set the BB-ID for the new operation panel to the same value as that prior to the start of maintenance. 23.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the operation panel. Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 369 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the operation panel requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 23.4 Removing the Operation Panel This section describes the procedure for removing the operation panel. Enable the removal of the operation panel before attempting to remove it. For details, see "23.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 23.4.1 Accessing the operation panel 1. 370 Check the ID switch on the operation panel and record the BB-ID set for the Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 crossbar box requiring maintenance. 2. Remove the front cover of the crossbar box. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 3. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "19.4.2 Removing a fan unit." 4. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper cover (C in the figure). Figure 23-2 Removing the upper cover B C A 5. B A Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then slide the lower cover to the left to remove it. Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 371 Figure 23-3 Removing the lower cover A 6. Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf. Arrange the removed cables in the center. Figure 23-4 7. 372 Removing the cables Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan shelf. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 23-5 8. Removing the fan shelf Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the center. Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 23.4.2 Removing the operation panel 1. Remove the cable connecting the fan shelf to the operation panel. Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 373 Figure 23-6 Operation panel cable Front 2. 374 Loosen the one screw securing the operation panel and then remove it. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 23-7 Removing the operation panel Front Note - Place the removed operation panel on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 23.5 Installing the Operation Panel This section describes the procedure for installing the operation panel. Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 375 23.5.1 Installing the operation panel 1. Set the BB-ID of the operation panel to the value prior to the start of maintenance. 2. Insert the operation panel into the fan shelf and then secure it with the screw. Figure 23-8 Installing the operation panel Front 3. 376 Reinstall the cable between the fan shelf and the operation panel. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 23-9 Operation panel cable Front 23.5.2 Restoring the chassis 1. Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and insert it into the chassis. Then, tighten the three screws. 2. Connect the two cables to the fan shelf. 3. Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw. 4. Install the upper cover and slide the right and left stoppers outwards. Then, tighten the two screws to secure the upper cover. 5. Install all the fan units. Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 377 For details, see "19.5.1 6. 23.6 Installing a fan unit." Install the front cover of the crossbar box. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the operation panel. 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 378 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the operation panel has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar cables (electrical). ■ Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 24.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) ■ Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) ■ Removing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) ■ Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) This section describes the configuration and the location of the ports that are used for connecting crossbar cables (electrical). The crossbar cables (electrical) are used make interconnections between SPARC M10-4S systems. Each crossbar cable (electrical) has a number that corresponds to a port number on the chassis. A port number is assigned to each pair of ports. Crossbar cables (electrical) should be replaced as a pair, therefore. 379 Figure 24-1 Connection ports for crossbar cables (electrical) XBU#0 Figure 24-2 380 XBU#1 2R 2R 2R 2R 2L 2L 2L 2L 1R 1R 1R 1R 1L 1L 1L 1L 0R 0R 0R 0R 0L 0L 0L 0L Crossbar cables (electrical) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 24.2 Location number Component 1 Crossbar cables (electrical) (CBL) Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the crossbar cables (electrical), as well as precautions that must be observed. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 24.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 24-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar cables (electrical). For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 24-1 Types of maintenance for crossbar cables (electrical) Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Without crossbar box Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported 24.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 24-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar cables (electrical). Table 24-2 Maintenance flow Task Replacement 1 Preparation 24.3 2 Removing the crossbar cables (electrical) 24.4 3 Installing the crossbar cables (electrical) 24.5 4 Restoring the system 24.6 Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 381 24.2.3 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when replacing a crossbar cable (electrical): Replace crossbar cables (electrical) in pairs. ■ 24.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the crossbar cables (electrical). The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 24.3.1 Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru 382 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 24.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 383 24.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar cables (electrical). Enable the removal of the crossbar cables (electrical) before attempting to remove them. For details, see "24.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. 384 Remove the two crossbar cables (electrical) from the SPARC M10-4S. Remove the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the connector lock completely released may cause damage. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 24-3 Removing the crossbar cables (electrical) A 2. 24.5 Remove the two crossbar cables (electrical) from the other chassis. Remove the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the tab of the cable and pulling it straight out in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the connector lock completely released may cause damage. Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical) This section describes the procedure for connecting the crossbar cables (electrical). 1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement crossbar cable (electrical). For the new crossbar cable (electrical), use the same type of label as the one on the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it. 2. Connect a pair of crossbar cables (electrical) to each chassis. Insert the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the connector part of the cable and inserting it straight into the opening. Do not hold the cable part when Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 385 inserting the cable. Note - If you insert a connector with the tab pulled, the connector may be damaged. Note - Check that the crossbar cables (electrical) are correctly connected and secure. 24.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the crossbar cables (electrical). The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ 24.6.1 System-stopped maintenance Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 386 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 24.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical) 387 For details, see "3.3.5 388 Checking log information." 5. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar cables (optical). ■ Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 25.1 ■ Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Optical) ■ Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical) ■ Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) ■ Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Optical) This section describes the configuration and the locations of the ports for connecting the crossbar cables (optical). The crossbar cables (optical) are used to connect the SPARC M10-4S to a crossbar box in a building block configuration (with a crossbar box). Each crossbar cable (optical) has a number that corresponds to a port number on the chassis. A port number is assigned to each pair of ports. Crossbar cables (optical) should be replaced as a pair, therefore. 389 Figure 25-1 Connection ports for crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S) XBU#0 Figure 25-2 XBU#1 2R 2R 2R 2R 2L 2L 2L 2L 1R 1R 1R 1R 1L 1L 1L 1L 0R 0R 0R 0R 0L 0L 0L 0L Connection ports for crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box) L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 #2 #1 #0 390 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 25-3 Crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S) Figure 25-4 Crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box) Location number Component 1 Crossbar cables (optical) (CBL) Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 391 25.2 Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Optical) This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the crossbar cables (optical), as well as precautions that must be observed. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 25.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 25-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar cables (optical). For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 25-1 Types of maintenance for crossbar cables (optical) Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped With a crossbar box Unsupported Unsupported Unsupported Supported Supported 25.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 25-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar cables (optical). Table 25-2 Maintenance flow Task 25.2.3 Replacement 1 Preparation 25.3 2 Removing the crossbar cables (optical) 25.4 3 Installing the crossbar cables (optical) 25.5 4 Restoring the system 25.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following when replacing the crossbar cables (optical): Replace the crossbar cables (optical) in pairs. ■ ■ 392 Do not place heavy objects on the crossbar cables (optical). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 ■ 25.3 Do not bend the crossbar cables (optical) unduly. If you unduly bend a crossbar cable (optical), it may be damaged. Ensure that the static/dynamic bending radius of the crossbar cable (optical) is no less than 35 mm (1.4 in.). Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical) This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a crossbar cable (optical). The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 25.3.1 Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the SPARC M10-4S requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 393 7. Remove all the power cords from the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 25.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the SPARC M10-4S requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 25.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar cables (optical). 394 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Enable the removal of the crossbar cables (optical) before attempting to remove them. For details, see "25.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical)." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove the two crossbar cables (optical) from the SPARC M10-4S. Remove the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the connector lock completely released may cause damage. Figure 25-5 2. Removing the crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S) Remove the other pair of crossbar cables (optical) from the crossbar box. Remove the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the connector lock completely released may cause damage. Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 395 Note - There is no problem if you remove the crossbar cables at the crossbar box while electricity is supplied. Note - The cables at the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the crossbar cables (optical), therefore, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support. Figure 25-6 25.5 Removing the crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box) Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical) This section describes the procedure for connecting the crossbar cables (optical). 1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement crossbar cable (optical). For the new crossbar cable (optical), use the same type of label as the one on the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it. 2. Connect a pair of crossbar cables (optical) to the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box. There are two types of crossbar cables (optical). Connect cables of the same type to the same port number. Cables can be distinguished by tab shape. For the tab shapes, see Figure 25-7. Note - There is no problem if you connect the crossbar cables (optical) at the crossbar box while electricity is supplied. Note - If you insert a connector with the tab pulled, the connector may be damaged. 396 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 25-7 Crossbar cable (optical) shapes and tabs (1) (1) Number in figure Description 1 Tab Insert the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the connector part of the cable and inserting it straight into the opening. Do not hold the cable part when inserting the cable. Note - Confirm that the crossbar cables (optical) are correctly connected and secure. Note - After installing the crossbar cables (optical), use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle the cables together and secure them to the rear cable support. 25.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the crossbar cable (optical). The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ 25.6.1 System-stopped maintenance Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all power cords to the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 397 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that SPARC M10-4S has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 25.6.2 Checking log information." 5. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all power cords to the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. 398 Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that SPARC M10-4S has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." 3. Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off. The example below specifies the following: 00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify one or more of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 5. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. Chapter 25 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical) 399 400 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF BB control cables. ■ Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables 26.1 ■ Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable ■ Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable ■ Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable ■ Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables This section describes the configuration and the location of the ports to which the XSCF BB control cables are connected. The XSCF BB control cables are used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box chassis. 401 Figure 26-1 Locations of XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S) (1) Figure 26-2 Locations of XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box) (1) 402 Location number Component 1 XSCF BB control cables (SCF_CBL) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 26.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the XSCF BB control cables. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 26.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 26-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF BB control cables. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 26-1 Types of maintenance for XSCF BB control cable Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration (without crossbar box) Supported (*) Supported Supported Supported Supported Building block configuration (with crossbar box) Supported (*) Supported Supported Supported Supported *: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If it is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby XSCF. 26.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 26-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF BB control cables. Table 26-2 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 26.3 2 Removing the XSCF BB control cables 26.4 3 Installing the XSCF BB control cables 26.5 4 Restoring the system 26.6 Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 403 26.3 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable This section describes preparations that must be completed prior to removing the XSCF BB control cables. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 26.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby XSCF. Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master chassis. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby 6. 404 Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 26.3.2 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Active/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 6. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 26.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 405 For details, see "3.3.5 26.3.4 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 26.3.5 406 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 26.4 Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable This section describes the procedure for removing the XSCF BB control cables. Enable removal of the XSCF BB control cables before attempting to remove them. For details, see "26.3 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove the XSCF BB control cable from the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in the figure) on the both sides of the cable. Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 407 Note - The cables on the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. When removing the XSCF BB control cables, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support. Figure 26-3 Removing the XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S) A 408 A Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 26-4 2. 26.5 Removing the XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box) Remove the XSCF BB control cables from the other chassis. Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in the figure) on the both sides of the cable. Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF BB control cables. 1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement XSCF BB control cable. For the new XSCF BB control cable, use the same type of label as the one on the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it. 2. Connect the XSCF BB control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 409 Note - Check that the XSCF BB control cables are correctly connected and secure. Note - After connecting the XSCF BB control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle the cables together and secure them to the rear cable support. 26.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF BB control cables. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance 26.6.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the switchscf command to switch the standby XSCF to the master XSCF. Execute the command if the chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to the standby XSCF. XSCF> switchscf -t Active 3. 26.6.2 Close the rack door. Active/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 410 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 26.6.3 26.6.4 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Close the rack door. Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 3. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 26.6.5 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Chapter 26 Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables 411 Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 412 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the chassis has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF DUAL control cables. ■ Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports 27.1 ■ Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable ■ Enabling the Removal of an XSCF DUAL Control Cable ■ Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable ■ Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports This section describes configuration and location of the XSCF DUAL control ports. The XSCF DUAL control cable is used to connect the master XSCF and a standby XSCF that are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box so as to duplicate the XSCF. 413 Figure 27-1 Location of XSCF DUAL control port (SPARC M10-4S) (1) Figure 27-2 Location of XSCF DUAL control port (crossbar box) (1) 414 Location number Component 1 XSCF DUAL control cables (SCF_DUAL) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 27.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the XSCF DUAL control cables. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 27.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 27-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF DUAL control cables. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 27-1 Types of maintenance for the XSCF DUAL control cables Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration (without crossbar box) Supported (*) Supported Supported Supported Supported Building block configuration (with crossbar box) Supported (*) Supported Supported Supported Supported *: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If it is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby XSCF. 27.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 27-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF DUAL control cables. Table 27-2 Maintenance flow Task Replacement 1 Preparation 27.3 2 Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables 27.4 3 Installing the XSCF DUAL control cables 27.5 4 Restoring the system 27.6 Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 415 27.3 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF DUAL Control Cable This section describes the preparation that must be completed prior to removing an XSCF DUAL control cable. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 27.3.1 Active/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby XSCF. Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master chassis. XSCF> switchscf -t Standby 6. 416 Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable requiring maintenance from the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 27.3.2 Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Active/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 6. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 27.3.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 417 For details, see "3.3.5 27.3.4 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 27.3.5 418 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 Checking log information." 4. Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 27.4 Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable This section describes the procedure for removing an XSCF DUAL control cable. Enable the removal of the XSCF DUAL control cables before attempting to remove them. For details, see "27.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 1. Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in the figure) on the both sides of the cable. Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 419 Note - The cables on the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the XSCF DUAL control cables, therefore, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support. 420 Figure 27-3 Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (SPARC M10-4S) Figure 27-4 Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (crossbar box) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 2. 27.5 Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the other chassis. Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons on the both sides of the cable. Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an XSCF DUAL control cable. 1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the replacement XSCF DUAL control cable. For the new XSCF DUAL control cable, use the same type of label as the one on the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it. 2. Connect the XSCF DUAL control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Note - Check that XSCF DUAL control cable is correctly connected and secure. Note - After connecting the XSCF DUAL control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle the cables together and fasten them to rear cable support. 27.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF DUAL control cables. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Hot maintenance 27.6.1 ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ Inactive/Hot maintenance ■ Inactive/Cold maintenance ■ System-stopped maintenance Active/Hot maintenance 1. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 2. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the FRU is operating Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 421 normally after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 3. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 4. 27.6.2 Close the rack door. Active/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable is operating normally after the completion of maintenance. XSCF> showstatus 4. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration and the status of each component. XSCF> showhardconf 5. 27.6.3 Inactive/Hot maintenance 1. 422 Close the rack door. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 For details, see "6.1 Command." 27.6.4 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru 2. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 3. Close the rack door. Inactive/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 27.6.5 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit of the chassis requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 4. Close the rack door. Chapter 27 Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables 423 424 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the cable kit mounted on the crossbar box. ■ Configuration of the Cable Kit 28.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Cable Kit ■ Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit ■ Removing the Cable Kit ■ Installing the Cable Kit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Cable Kit This section describes the configuration and location of the cable kit. The cable kit is a set of cables for connections between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board and between the terminal board and fan backplane. The cable kit contains the following cables. 28.1.1 Cables for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board ■ Cable (SIG) Cable for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (SIG) 425 Figure 28-1 Cable (SIG) (between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board) (1) (2) Location number Component 1 Connector (terminal board (SIG) side) 2 Connector (crossbar backplane unit side) ■ Cable (PWR) Cable for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (PWR) Figure 28-2 Cable (PWR) (between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board) (1) 426 (2) Location number Component 1 Connector (terminal board (PWR) side) 2 Connector (crossbar backplane unit side) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 28.1.2 Cables for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane ■ Cable (PWR) Cable for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane (PWR) Figure 28-3 Cable (PWR) (between the terminal board and fan backplane) (1) (2) Location number Component 1 Connector (terminal board side) 2 Connector (fan backplane (PWR) side) ■ Cable (SIG) Cable for the connection of the terminal board and fan backplane (SIG) to the operation panel Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 427 Figure 28-4 Cable (SIG) (for the terminal board and fan backplane to the operation panel) (1) (2) (3) 28.1.3 Location number Component 1 Connector (terminal board side) 2 Connector (fan backplane (SIG) side) 3 Connector (operation panel side) Locations for the cable kit The locations of cable kit connections are as follows. 428 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-5 Locations for the cable kit (5) (4) (3) (2) 28.2 (1) Location number Component Connection 1 Cable (SIG) Crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (SIG) 2 Cable (PWR) Crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (PWR) 3 Terminal board 4 Cable (SIG) Terminal board (SIG) and fan backplane 5 Cable (PWR) Terminal board (PWR) and fan backplane Before Maintaining the Cable Kit This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the cable kit. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 28.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 28-1 lists the types of maintenance for the cable kit. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 429 Table 28-1 Types of maintenance for cable kit Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Unsupported Unsupported (*1) Supported (*2) *1: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off. *2: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down. 28.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 28-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the cable kit. Table 28-2 28.3 Maintenance flow Details of update process Replacement 1 Preparation 28.3 2 Removing the cable kit 28.4 3 Installing the cable kit 28.5 4 Restoring the system 28.6 Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the cable kit. Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Log in to the XSCF shell. 3. Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring maintenance. XSCF> showlogs error For details, see "3.3.5 4. 430 Checking log information." Confirm the hardware and software configurations. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration." Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 5. Power off all the physical partitions. For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar backplane unit requiring maintenance from the system. XSCF> replacefru For details, see "5.1 Command." 7. Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly. 28.4 Removing the Cable Kit This section describes the procedure for removing the cable kit at each cable connection destination. For the cable connection destinations, see "28.1 Configuration of the Cable Kit." Enable the removal of the cable kit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "28.3 Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." 28.4.1 Removing the cables for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board Remove the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board. 1. Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 2. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit." Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 431 3. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper cover (C in the figure). Figure 28-6 Removing the upper cover B C A 4. A Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then slide the lower cover to the left to remove it. Figure 28-7 Removing the lower cover A 5. 432 B Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf. Arrange the removed cables in the center. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-8 6. Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan shelf. Figure 28-9 7. Removing the cables Removing the fan shelf Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the center. Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 8. Remove the cable connected to the crossbar backplane unit from the connector. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 433 Figure 28-10 434 Removing the cable (cable (SIG)) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-11 9. Removing the cable (cable (PWR)) Remove the cable from the clamps. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 435 Figure 28-12 28.4.2 Removing the cables Removing the cables for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane Remove the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the terminal board and fan backplane. 1. Remove the front cover. For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover." 436 2. Remove all the fan units. For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit." 3. Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper cover (C in the figure). Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-13 Removing the upper cover B C B A 4. A Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then slide the lower cover to the left to remove it. Figure 28-14 Removing the lower cover A 5. Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf. Arrange the removed cables in the center. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 437 Figure 28-15 6. Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan shelf. Figure 28-16 7. Removing the cables Removing the fan shelf Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it from the chassis. Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the center. Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat. 8. 438 Remove the cable connecting the fan backplane from the connector. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-17 Removing the cable (cable (PWR)) Figure 28-18 Removing the cable (cable (SIG)) 9. Remove the cable connecting the fan shelf and operation panel from the Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 439 connector on the operation panel. Perform this step only when removing the cable (SIG). To remove the cable (PWR), proceed to step 10. Figure 28-19 Operation panel cable Front 10. Remove the cable from the terminal board. ■ For the cable (PWR), push the connector toward the back while pushing up the lower latch (A in the figure) with a flathead screwdriver. Confirm that the lower latch (A in the figure) has been pushed to the back of the terminal board. Push the connector toward the back while pushing down the upper latch (B in the figure) with a flathead screwdriver. 440 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-20 Removing the cable (cable (PWR)) B A ■ For the cable (SIG), remove the two cable connector screws with a Phillips screwdriver (bit No. 1), and then remove the cable from the terminal board. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 441 Figure 28-21 Removing the cable (cable (SIG)) 11. Remove the cable from the clamps. 442 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-22 Removing the cable (cable (PWR)) Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 443 Figure 28-23 28.5 Removing the cable (cable (SIG)) Installing the Cable Kit This section describes the procedure for installing the cable kit at each cable connection destination. For the cable connection destinations, see "28.1 Configuration of the Cable Kit." Install a cable that has the same shape as the removed cable. 28.5.1 Installing a cable between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board Install the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board. 1. Connect the cable to the connector of the crossbar backplane unit. Install the cable that has the same shape as the removed cable. 444 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-24 Connector shape (cable (SIG)) 2. Secure the cable with a clamp. 3. Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully into the chassis. Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf. 4. Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf. 5. Connect the two cables to the fan shelf. 6. Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw. 7. Install the upper cover. 8. Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure the cover with the two screws. 9. Install all the fan units. For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit." 10. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." 28.5.2 Installing a cable for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane Install the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the terminal board and fan backplane. 1. Install the cable on the terminal board. - For the cable (PWR), install the connector that has latches (A in the figure) on both ends to the terminal board. Install the tab (B in the figure) of the connector such that it fits in the notched section (C in the figure) of the terminal board. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 445 Figure 28-25 Installing the cable (cable (PWR)) A C B - For the cable (SIG), install the connector that has a threaded hole to the terminal board. Use the screw that was removed from the same location before. Tighten the screw with a Phillips screwdriver (bit No. 1). When installing the connector, orient the connector so that the dot mark (A in the figure) is on the left as shown in Figure 28-26. 446 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-26 Installing the cable (cable (SIG)) A 2. Connect the cable to the connector of the fan backplane. 3. Connect the cable connecting the fan shelf and operation panel to the connector on the operation panel. Perform this step only when installing the cable (SIG). To install the cable (PWR), proceed to step 4. Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 447 Figure 28-27 Operation panel cable Front 4. 448 Secure the cable with a clamp. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 28-28 Securing the cable (cable (PWR)) Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 449 Figure 28-29 Securing the cable (cable (SIG)) 5. Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully into the chassis. Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf. 6. Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf. 7. Connect the two cables to the fan shelf. 8. Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw. 9. Install the upper cover. 10. Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure the cover with the two screws. 11. Install all the fan units. For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit." 12. Install the front cover. For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover." 450 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 28.6 Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the cable kit. 1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box requiring maintenance. For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord." Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance. 2. Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm that the crossbar backplane unit has been incorporated into the system. For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command." 3. Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables. - When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the incorporated physical partition is powered off: The example below specifies the following: 00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 01: The BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify more than one of these.) To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like "diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02". XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 - When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is powered on: The example below specifies the following: 00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis 02: The PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected (You can specify only one of these.) XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02 4. Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating normally. XSCF> showlogs error Chapter 28 Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box 451 For details, see "3.3.5 452 Checking log information." 5. Power on all the physical partitions. For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance." 6. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Chapter 29 Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the dedicated power distribution unit (PDU) mounted on the rack for expanded connection. ■ Configuration of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit 29.1 ■ Before Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit ■ Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit ■ Removing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit ■ Installing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit ■ Restoring the System Configuration of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit This section describes the configuration and location of the PDU. The PDU is installed on the rack for expanded connection. It is compatible with both single- and three-phase power feeds. 453 Figure 29-1 Location of the PDU (4) (2) (3) (1) Rear Location number Component 1 Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#0) 2 Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#1) 3 Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#2) (*) 4 Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#3) (*) *: This is mounted when the two expanded connection racks have been installed. 454 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 29.2 Before Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the PDU, as well as some precautions. Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work." 29.2.1 Types of maintenance Table 29-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PDU. For the definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance." Table 29-1 Types of PDU maintenance Configuration Active/hot Active/cold Inactive/hot Inactive/cold System stopped Building block configuration Unsupported Supported Unsupported Unsupported Supported 29.2.2 Maintenance flow Table 29-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the PDU. Table 29-2 Maintenance flow Task 29.2.3 Replacement 1 Preparation 29.3 2 Removing the PDU 29.4 3 Installing the PDU 29.5 4 Restoring the system 29.6 Precautions for replacement Note the following points when you replace a PDU. ■ The SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box are connected to the two PDUs with power cords. Thus the system can continue to operate even if one of the PDUs fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended period when one unit Chapter 29 Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection 455 has failed. ■ 29.3 When replacing multiple PDUs, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the PDUs cannot be preserved, then system-stopped maintenance must be performed. Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a PDU. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance ■ 29.3.1 System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance Caution - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only when the power supply unit has a redundant configuration. 1. Open the rack door. 2. Disconnect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes from the PDU requiring maintenance. Note - Make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them, to ensure that they are reconnected correctly. 29.3.2 System-stopped maintenance 1. Open the rack door. 2. Stop the entire system. For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System." 3. Disconnect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes from the PDU requiring maintenance. Note - Make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them, to ensure that they are reconnected correctly. 456 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 29.4 Removing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit This section describes the procedure for removing the dedicated power distribution unit. Enable the removal of the dedicated power distribution unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "29.3 Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit." Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes Regarding Static Electricity." Caution - Two people must be present when the power cables are to be removed. If you perform this work alone, you may injure yourself or cause damage to the PDU because the PDU is heavy. 1. Chapter 29 Remove the four PDU screws. Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection 457 Figure 29-2 2. 458 PDU screws Grasp the top and bottom of the PDU, and then pull it out. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure 29-3 3. Pulling out the PDU Disconnect all the power cables from the rear of the PDU. Note - Hold the plugs of the power cables, and then pull them straight out. Chapter 29 Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection 459 Figure 29-4 PDU power cables The number of power cables and the plug type may vary depending on the power environment, as follows: - For a single-phase power feed: Four power cables are connected to the PDU. To pull them out, push the upper and lower latches (A in the figure). Figure 29-5 Power cable connector for single-phase power feed A A - For a three-phase power feed: Three power cables are connected to the PDU. To pull them out, turn the ring 460 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 (A in the figure) counterclockwise. Figure 29-6 Power cable connector for three-phase power feed A 29.5 Installing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit This section describes the procedure for installing a PDU. 1. Connect all the power cables to the rear of the PDU. Note - Hold each power cable plug, and then insert it straight into the socket. - For a single-phase power feed: Connect four power cables to the PDU. - For a three-phase power feed Connect three power cables to the PDU. Install each power cable by holding its plug, and then secure it by turning the ring clockwise. Note - Ensure that the power cables are correctly connected and secure. 29.6 2. Install the PDU into the rack for expanded connection. 3. Install the four PDU screws. Restoring the System This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the PDU. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows: ■ Active/Cold maintenance Chapter 29 Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection 461 ■ 29.6.1 System-stopped maintenance Active/Cold maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes to the PDU requiring maintenance. Note - Reconnect the power cords at their original locations by referring to the notes you made prior to the start of maintenance. 2. 29.6.2 Close the rack door. System-stopped maintenance 1. Connect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes to the PDU requiring maintenance. Note - Reconnect the power cords at their original locations by referring to the notes you made prior to the start of maintenance. 462 2. Start the entire system. For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System." 3. Close the rack door. Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Appendix A Component List This appendix describes components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S, the crossbar box, and the expanded connection rack. Figure A-1 Locations of components of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S (1) (15) (14) (2) (3) (2) (13) (4) (5) (12) (6) (7) (11) (8) (10) (9) 463 Location number Component 1 CPU memory unit upper 2 Side cover 3 Memory 4 PSU backplane unit 5 Fan shelf 6 Fan unit 7 Front cover 8 Internal disk 9 Power supply unit 10 Operation panel 11 PCI Express card cassette 12 PCI Express card 13 Crossbar unit mounting frame (*) 14 Crossbar unit (*) 15 CPU memory unit lower *: Not mounted on SPARC M10-4. 464 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure A-2 Locations of components of crossbar box (1) (14) (2) (13) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (12) (11) (10) (9) Location number Component 1 XSCF interface unit 2 Crossbar backplane unit 3 Fan backplane 4 Fan shelf 5 Fan unit 6 Upper cover 7 Lower cover 8 Front cover 9 Guide plate fixing bracket 10 Guide plate 11 Operation panel 12 Power supply unit 13 Crossbar unit Appendix A Component List 465 Location number Component 14 XSCF unit Figure A-3 Locations of components of expanded connection rack (2) (3) (1) Rear 466 Location number Component 1 Dedicated power distribution unit 2 Expanded connection rack 3 Crossbar box Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Appendix B Component Specifications This appendix provides the specifications of the components. The components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box are as follows. Components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S ■ CPU Memory Unit ■ Crossbar Unit ■ Power Supply Unit ■ Fan Unit ■ Internal Disk Drive ■ PCI Express Card ■ Backplanes ■ Operation Panel Components that constitute the crossbar box B.1 ■ Crossbar Unit ■ XSCF Unit ■ XSCF Interface Unit ■ Power Supply Unit ■ Fan Unit ■ Backplanes ■ Operation Panel CPU Memory Unit The CPU memory unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S consists of two units: the upper 467 unit and lower unit. The CPU memory unit lower consists of the following components. ■ CPU ■ Memory ■ XSCF ■ PCI Express (PCIe) backplane The CPU memory unit upper consists of the following components. CPU ■ ■ Memory CPU and XSCF are directly installed on the CPU memory unit. Thus you cannot replace the CPU and XSCF individually. Each CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower is available in eight different types based on the combination of CPU type and the number of memory slots. Table B-1 lists the specifications of the CPU memory unit. Table B-1 Specifications of CPU memory unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Maximum number of CPU memory units 2 Location Inside of chassis Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units." B.2 Crossbar Unit The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box are crossbar switches that logically connect the CPU memory unit and I/O unit. The crossbar unit has two operation modes. One is normal mode that provides 2-way operation. The other is degraded mode that provides 1-way operation, which is half of normal mode. Table B-2 and Table B-3 list the specifications of the crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. Table B-2 468 Specifications of crossbar unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Number of crossbar units 2 Location Rear of chassis Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table B-2 Specifications of crossbar unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (continued) Item Description Type of maintenance Inactive/cold and system-stopped Maintenance category Replacement Table B-3 Specifications of crossbar unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of crossbar units 3 Location Rear of chassis Type of maintenance System stopped Maintenance category Replacement See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures: SPARC M10-4S: Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units Crossbar box: Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box B.3 XSCF Unit The XSCF unit of the crossbar box is a control unit that is central to the system. The functions of an XSCF are as follows: ■ Controlling each unit ■ Console function for each physical partition that uses the TTY communication protocol ■ Communication with each physical partition that uses a command interface ■ Managing system information ■ Browser-based user interface function ■ Connection with a maintenance terminal ■ Next remote chassis interface ■ System power control and cluster control that use a power supply interlocking function Table B-4 lists the specifications of the XSCF unit of the crossbar box. Table B-4 Specifications of XSCF unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of XSCF units 1 Location Rear of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped Appendix B Component Specifications 469 Table B-4 Specifications of XSCF unit (crossbar box) (continued) Item Description Maintenance category Replacement For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 17 Crossbar Box." B.4 Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Power Supply Unit The power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box take power from the input power and supply it to the system. The redundant configuration of the power supply units allows the system to continue operating even if one of the units fails during operation. Table B-5 and Table B-6 list the specifications of the power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. Table B-5 Specifications of the power supply unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Number of power supply units 2 Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement Table B-6 Specifications of power supply unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of power supply units 2 Location Rear of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures: SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units Crossbar box: Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box 470 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 B.5 Fan Unit Five fan units are mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and four on the crossbar box. They provide a flow of air to cool the inside of the chassis. Each fan unit has two cooling fans. Table B-7 and Table B-8 list the specifications of the fan units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. Table B-7 Specifications of fan unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Number of fan units 5 Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement Table B-8 Specifications of fan unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of fan units 4 Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures: SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units Crossbar box: Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box B.6 Internal Disk Drive Up to eight hard disks or solid state disks can be mounted as internal disks on SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Table B-9 lists the specifications of the internal disk drive. Table B-9 Specifications of the internal disk drive (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Maximum number of internal disk drives 8 Interface SAS Appendix B Component Specifications 471 Table B-9 Specifications of the internal disk drive (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (continued) Item Description Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 12 B.7 Maintaining the Internal Disks." PCI Express Card Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit mounted. For a SPARC M10-4 with no crossbar unit mounted, up to 11 PCIe cards can be mounted. Table B-10 lists the specifications of the PCIe card. Table B-10 Specifications of PCIe card (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Maximum number of PCIe cards 11 (*) Location Rear of chassis Type of maintenance Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement, expansion, and reduction *: Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4. For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards." B.8 XSCF Interface Unit The XSCF interface unit of the crossbar box mounts the identification information. The XSCF interface unit and each of the other units are connected by the crossbar backplane unit. Table B-11 lists the specifications of the XSCF interface unit of the crossbar box. Table B-11 472 Specifications of XSCF interface unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of XSCF interface units 1 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table B-11 Specifications of XSCF interface unit (crossbar box) (continue d) Item Description Location Rear of chassis Type of maintenance System stopped Maintenance category Replacement For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 20 Unit of the Crossbar Box." B.9 Maintaining the XSCF Interface Backplanes The backplanes of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box have connectors for connecting replaceable units in the chassis. The PSU backplane unit of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S mounts the memory that stores the identification information and the user setting information. The backplane of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is shown below. ■ PSU backplane unit (A in the figure) Appendix B Component Specifications 473 Figure B-1 Location of backplane of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S A Table B-12 lists the specifications of the PSU backplane unit. Table B-12 Specifications of PSU backplane unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Number of PSU backplane units 1 Location Inside of chassis Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 14 Unit." Maintaining the PSU Backplane The backplanes of the crossbar box are shown below. Crossbar backplane unit (A in the figure) ■ ■ 474 Fan backplane (B in the figure) Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Figure B-2 Locations of backplanes of crossbar box B A Table B-13 and Table B-14 list the specifications of the crossbar backplane and the fan backplane units, respectively. Table B-13 Specifications of crossbar backplane unit (crossbar box) Item Description Number of crossbar backplane units 1 Location Inside of chassis Type of maintenance System stopped Maintenance category Replacement Table B-14 Specifications of fan backplane (crossbar box) Item Description Number of fan backplanes 1 Appendix B Component Specifications 475 Table B-14 Specifications of fan backplane (crossbar box) (continue d) Item Description Location Inside of chassis Type of maintenance System stopped Maintenance category Replacement See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures: Crossbar backplane unit of crossbar box: Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box Fan backplane of crossbar box: Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box B.10 Operation Panel The operation panels of the PARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box are installed in the front of the chassis. This panel displays the system status and is used for operation. Table B-15 and Table B-16 list the specifications of the operation panels of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. Table B-15 Specifications of operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) Item Description Number of operation panels 1 Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped Maintenance category Replacement Table B-16 Specifications of operation panel (crossbar box) Item Description Number of operation panels 1 Location Front of chassis Type of maintenance System stopped Maintenance category Replacement See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures: SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel Crossbar box: Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box 476 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands This appendix describes how to use Oracle Solaris commands to display fault diagnosis information and to take countermeasures. The commands listed here are useful for determining whether there are problems in the system, the network, or some other system connected through the network. ■ iostat(1M) Command C.1 ■ prtdiag(1M) Command ■ prtconf(1M) Command ■ netstat(1M) Command ■ ping(1M) Command ■ ps(1) Command ■ prstat(1M) Command iostat(1M) Command The iostat(1M) command periodically reports the CPU usage status, as well as the terminal status, the drive status, and the I/O status. Table C-1 lists the options of the iostat(1M) command and how those options can be applied to solving system issues. Table C-1 iostat(1M) command options Option Description Application No options Reports the status of the local I/O device. Allows you to view the device status concisely in 3 lines. -c Reports the rates of periods during which the system has been in user mode, system mode, I/O waiting, and idling. Allows you to view the CPU status as a concise report. 477 Table C-1 iostat(1M) command options (continued) Option Description Application -e Displays a summary of statistics on the device errors. Displayed items are the total number of errors, hardware errors, software errors, and transfer errors. Allows you to view the accumulated number of errors as a concise table and to identify potentially failed I/O devices. -E Displays the entire statistics of the device errors. Allows you to view device information (manufacturer, model number, serial number, size, and errors). -n Displays the names in a descriptive form. Allows you to identify devices with a descriptive display. -x Reports the extended drive statistics of individual drives. Statistics are displayed in a table format. Similar to the -e option, but differs in that it provides rate information. Allows you to find internal devices and other I/O devices on the network whose performance is low. The following example shows the iostat(1M) command output. # iostat -En c5t50000393D85129FAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No: EB25PC201AL6 Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes> Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0 Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0 c3t50000393D851FDAAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No: EB25PC201AMS Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes> Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0 Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0 c4t50000393D822D2B6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No: EB25PC2015P8 Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes> Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0 Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0 c2t50000393E8001BB6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors: Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC Revision: 3706 Serial No: EB25PC301AV6 Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes> Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0 Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0 # 478 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 0 0 0 0 C.2 prtdiag(1M) Command The prtdiag(1M) command displays information on system settings and diagnosis. Diagnosis information displays FRUs in the system that experienced errors. The prtdiag(1M) command is in the following directory: /usr/platform/platformname/sbin/. The prtdiag(1M) command may display a slot number that differs from those supposed to be displayed according to other parts of this manual. This does not indicate a fault. Table C-2 lists the options of the prtdiag(1M) command and how those options are useful for troubleshooting. Table C-2 prtdiag(1M) command option Option Description Application No options Displays a list of components. Allows you to check the CPU information, the memory configuration, the mounted PCI Express (PCIe) cards, the OpenBootPROM version, the mode switch status, and the CPU operation mode. -v Displays information in detailed (Verbose) mode. In addition to the content displayed when no option is specified, this option allows you to check detailed information of the PCIe card. The following example shows the prtdiag(1M) command output. # prtdiag -v System Configuration: Oracle Corporation Memory size: 64000 Megabytes sun4v SPARC M10-4 ================================ Virtual CPUs ================================ CPU ID -----0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Frequency --------3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz 3000 MHz Implementation ---------------------SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X SPARC64-X Status ------on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 479 11 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------59 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line 60 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line 61 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line 62 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line 63 3000 MHz SPARC64-X on-line ======================= Physical Memory Configuration ======================== Segment Table: -------------------------------------------------------------Base Segment Interleave Bank Contains Address Size Factor Size Modules -------------------------------------------------------------0x0 32 GB 4 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM00A /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM01A 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM02A /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM03A 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM04A /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM05A 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM06A /BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM07A 0x20000000000 32 GB 4 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM10A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM11A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM12A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM13A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM14A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM15A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM16A /BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM17A ================================ IO Devices ================================ Slot + Bus Name + Model Speed Status Type Path ---------------------------------------------------------------------------/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA PCIE scsi-pciex1000,87 LSI,2308_2 5.0GTx8 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0 /BB0/CMUL/NET0 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0 /BB0/CMUL/NET1 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0,1 /BB0/CMUL/NET2 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0 /BB0/CMUL/NET3 PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656 2.5GTx1 /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0,1 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000 5.0GTx4 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000 5.0GTx4 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0,1 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001 QLE8152 5.0GTx4 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ 480 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,2 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001 QLE8152 5.0GTx4 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,3 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100 LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100 LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0,1 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,1 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,2 /BB0/PCI0 PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8 /pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/ pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,3 MB PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0310 -/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4 MB PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0320 -/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4,1 ============================ Environmental Status ============================ ============================ FRU Status ============================ Location Name Status -----------------------------------------------------SYS enabled ============================ FW Version ============================ Version -----------------------------------------------------------2002 ====================== System PROM revisions ======================= Version -----------------------------------------------------------OBP 4.34.0 2012/08/15 17:56 Chassis Serial Number --------------------2081203001 # Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 481 C.3 prtconf(1M) Command The prtconf(1M) command displays a list of configured devices. The prtconf(1M) command identifies hardware units recognized by Oracle Solaris. When a software application experiences a hardware-related issue even though there is no hardware error, this command allows you to check whether Oracle Solaris recognizes the hardware and whether the hardware drivers are loaded. Table C-3 lists the options of the prtconf(1M) command and how those options are useful for troubleshooting. Table C-3 prtconf(1M) command options Option Description Application No options Displays a device tree for the devices recognized by Oracle Solaris. A hardware device is regarded as operating normally if it is recognized. If the message "(driver not attached)" is displayed for a device or a sub-device, the driver for the device is corrupted or does not exist. -D The displayed content is similar to the case when there are no options, but is different in that it contains device driver names. Allows you to check the driver necessary for Oracle Solaris to enable the device, or to view a list of drivers to be used. -p The display content is similar to the case when there are no options, but is different in that the display is simpler. Allows you to view the devices as a simple list. -V Displays the version and date of the OpenBoot PROM firmware. Allows you to check the firmware version quickly. The following example shows the prtconf(1M) command output. # prtconf System Configuration: Oracle Corporation Memory size: 131304 Megabytes System Peripherals (Software Nodes): sun4v ORCL,SPARC64-X scsi_vhci, instance #0 packages (driver not attached) SUNW,builtin-drivers (driver not attached) SUNW,probe-error-handler (driver not attached) deblocker (driver not attached) disk-label (driver not attached) terminal-emulator (driver not attached) dropins (driver not attached) SUNW,asr (driver not attached) kbd-translator (driver not attached) 482 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 obp-tftp (driver not attached) zfs-file-system (driver not attached) hsfs-file-system (driver not attached) chosen (driver not attached) openprom (driver not attached) client-services (driver not attached) options, instance #0 aliases (driver not attached) memory (driver not attached) virtual-memory (driver not attached) iscsi-hba (driver not attached) disk (driver not attached) virtual-devices, instance #0 console, instance #0 rtc (driver not attached) flashprom (driver not attached) console (driver not attached) channel-devices, instance #0 virtual-channel, instance #0 virtual-channel, instance #3 virtual-console-concentrator, instance #0 virtual-network-switch, instance #0 virtual-disk-server, instance #0 virtual-channel-client, instance #1 virtual-channel-client, instance #2 pciv-communication, instance #0 virtual-domain-service, instance #0 cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) cpu (driver not attached) pci, instance #0 pci, instance #0 pci, instance #1 pci, instance #2 scsi, instance #0 iport, instance #8 smp, instance #3 disk, instance #8 enclosure, instance #3 iport, instance #11 pci, instance #3 pci, instance #5 usb, instance #0 usb, instance #0 hub, instance #0 pci, instance #4 network, instance #0 network, instance #1 pci, instance #6 Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 483 network, instance #2 network, instance #3 pci, instance #1 pci, instance #7 pci, instance #8 pci, instance #9 pci, instance #10 pci, instance #11 pci, instance #2 pci, instance #12 pci, instance #13 pci, instance #14 pci, instance #15 pci, instance #16 pci, instance #17 pci, instance #3 pci, instance #18 pci, instance #19 pci, instance #20 pci, instance #21 pci, instance #22 pci, instance #23 pci, instance #4 pci, instance #24 pci, instance #25 pci, instance #26 scsi, instance #1 iport, instance #6 smp, instance #1 disk, instance #6 enclosure, instance #1 iport, instance #9 pci, instance #27 pci, instance #29 usb, instance #1 usb, instance #1 hub, instance #2 pci, instance #28 network, instance #4 network, instance #5 pci, instance #30 network, instance #6 network, instance #7 ------------------------Ommitted-----------------------pci, instance #22 pci, instance #101 pci, instance #102 pci, instance #103 pci, instance #104 pci, instance #19 pci, instance #105 pci, instance #23 pci, instance #106 pci, instance #107 pci, instance #108 484 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 pci, instance #109 pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance pci-performance-counters, instance ramdisk-root (driver not attached) os-io (driver not attached) fcoe, instance #0 iscsi, instance #0 pseudo, instance #0 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15 #16 #20 #17 #21 #18 #22 #19 #23 # C.4 netstat(1M) Command The netstat(1M) command displays the network status and the protocol statistics. This command allows you to view a list of connections maintained by the host and their status. This command also allows you to check the packet statistics and error conditions of IP, TCP, and UDP. Table C-4 lists the options of the netstat(1M) command and how those options can be applied to solving issues. Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 485 Table C-4 netstat(1M) command options Option Description Application -i Displays the interface status. The displayed content includes information on incoming and outgoing packets, incoming and outgoing errors, collisions, and queues. Allows you to view a concise overview of the network status. -i interval Specifying a numeric value after the -i option executes the netstat(1M) command at intervals of the specified number of seconds. Identifies intermittent or long-term network events. You can view nighttime events at a glance by piping the netstat output to a file. -p Displays the media table. Allows you to check the MAC addresses of the host on the subnetwork. -r Displays the routing table. Allows you to check the routing information. -n Converts a host name into an IP address and then displays it. Allows you to check the IP address instead of the host name. The following example shows the netstat(1M) command output. # netstat -p Net to Media Table: IPv4 Device IP Address ------ -------------------net0 4S-111-D0 net0 10.24.187.1 net0 224.0.0.22 Net to Media Table: IPv6 If Physical Address ----- ----------------net0 33:33:00:00:00:01 net0 33:33:00:00:00:02 net0 33:33:00:01:00:02 net0 33:33:00:00:00:16 net0 b0:99:28:98:30:36 net0 33:33:ff:98:30:36 Mask --------------255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 Type ------other other other other local other Flags Phys Addr -------- --------------SPLA b0:99:28:98:30:36 00:0a:b8:50:cd:42 S 01:00:5e:00:00:16 State -----------REACHABLE REACHABLE REACHABLE REACHABLE REACHABLE REACHABLE Destination/Mask --------------------------ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:2 ff02::16 fe80::b299:28ff:fe98:3036 ff02::1:ff98:3036 # C.5 ping(1M) Command The ping(1M) command sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to network hosts. 486 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 In certain configurations of the ping(1M) command, the command output allows you to identify a network link or a node that has experienced a problem. The destination host is specified by the variable: hostname. Table C-5 lists the options of the ping(1M) command and how those options are useful for troubleshooting. Table C-5 ping(1M) command options Option Description Application hostname When you send a probe packet to hostname, a message is returned. Allows you to confirm that a host is active on the network. -g hostname Forces the probe packet to go through the specified gateway. Allows you to test the quality of individual routes by sending the packet to the target host via various routes specified. -i interface Specifies the interface to be used for sending and receiving a probe packet. Allows you to easily check the secondary network interface. -n Converts a host name into an IP address and then displays it. Allows you to check the IP address instead of the host name. -s ping is repeated at intervals of 1 second. Pressing the [Ctrl] + [C] keys stops ping, and then displays the statistics. Allows you to check intermittent or long-term network events. You can view nighttime network events at one time by piping the ping output to a file. -svR Displays the routes that probe packets have passed through at intervals of 1 second. Displays the routes and hop counts of probe packets, allowing you to compare multiple routes to identify any bottleneck. The following example shows the ping(1M) command output. # ping -s 10.24.187.50 PING 10.24.187.50: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=0. time=0.555 ms 64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=1. time=0.400 ms 64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=2. time=0.447 ms ^C ----10.24.187.50 PING Statistics---3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max/stddev = 0.400/0.467/0.555/0.079 # Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 487 C.6 ps(1) Command The ps(1) command displays a list of process statuses. When no options are specified, the command displays information of processes that have the same execution user ID as the executing user and the same control terminal. If you specify an option, output information is controlled by the option. Table C-6 lists the options of the ps(1M) command and how those options are useful for troubleshooting. Table C-6 ps(1M) command options Option Description Application -e Displays information on various processes. Allows you to view the process IDs and files that can be executed. -f Generates a complete list. Allows you to view process information such as the user ID, the parent process ID, the execution time, and the paths to the executed files. -o option Selects any items from those that can be configured as outputs. Options of pid, pcpu, pmem, and comm display the process ID, CPU usage, memory usage, and the corresponding executable files, respectively. Allows you to check only the most important information. By knowing the resource usage rate, you can identify processes that potentially affect the system performance and cause hang ups. The following example shows the ps(1M) command output. # ps -eo pcpu,pid,comm|sort -rn %CPU PID COMMAND 0.0 674 sort 0.0 673 ps 0.0 637 -bash 0.0 636 login 0.0 634 /usr/sbin/in.telnetd 0.0 629 -bash 0.0 613 /usr/bin/login 0.0 602 /usr/lib/devchassis/devchassisd 0.0 600 /opt/SUNWldm/bin/ldmd 0.0 581 /usr/lib/inet/in.ndpd 0.0 580 /sbin/dhcpagent 0.0 577 /usr/lib/rmvolmgr 0.0 548 /usr/sbin/auditd 0.0 519 /usr/sbin/syslogd 0.0 508 /usr/lib/ssh/sshd 0.0 497 /usr/lib/fm/fmd/fmd 0.0 487 /usr/lib/hal/hald-addon-cpufreq 0.0 472 /usr/lib/autofs/automountd 488 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 470 468 458 453 450 421 413 382 369 332 297 272 179 176 171 164 161 158 128 112 98 74 73 59 38 13 11 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 /usr/lib/autofs/automountd /usr/lib/inet/inetd hald-runner /usr/lib/hal/hald /usr/sbin/rpcbind /usr/lib/inet/proftpd /usr/sbin/cron /lib/svc/method/iscsid /usr/lib/efcode/sparcv9/efdaemon /usr/sbin/nscd /usr/lib/picl/picld /lib/inet/nwamd /usr/lib/devfsadm/devfsadmd /usr/lib/zones/zonestatd /usr/lib/ldoms/drd /usr/lib/ldoms/ldmad /usr/lib/utmpd /usr/lib/dbus-daemon /usr/lib/sysevent/syseventd /usr/lib/pfexecd /lib/inet/in.mpathd /lib/crypto/kcfd /lib/inet/ipmgmtd /usr/sbin/dlmgmtd /lib/inet/netcfgd /lib/svc/bin/svc.configd /lib/svc/bin/svc.startd vmtasks intrd kmem_task zpool-rpool fsflush pageout /usr/sbin/init sched # C.7 prstat(1M) Command The prstat(1M) command repeatedly tests all the active processes on the system, and provides statistics based on the specified output mode and sorting order. The output of the prstat(1M) command is similar to that of the ps(1M) command. Table C-7 lists the options of the prstat(1M) command and how those options can be applied to solving issues. Appendix C Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands 489 Table C-7 prstat(1M) command options Option Description Application No options Displays a list of processes sorted in descending order of CPU resource consumption. The list is restricted by the height of the terminal window and the number of processes. The output is automatically updated every 5 seconds, and is stopped by pressing the [Ctrl] + [C] keys. The output allows you to view process IDs, the User IDs, memory usage, status, CPU usage, and command names. -n number Restricts the number of lines in the output. Limits the amount of displayed data, so that you can identify those processes that are consuming excessive amounts of resources. -s key Sorts the list by key parameter. The list can be sorted by cpu (default), time, and size. -v Displays the information in detailed mode. Allows you to view other parameters. The following example shows the prstat(1M) command output. # prstat -n 5 -s size PID USERNAME SIZE RSS STATE PRI NICE TIME CPU PROCESS/NLWP 497 root 55M 49M sleep 59 0 0:01:12 0.0% fmd/37 600 root 41M 36M sleep 59 0 0:09:13 0.0% ldmd/13 11 root 37M 33M sleep 59 0 0:00:17 0.0% svc.startd/12 468 root 24M 12M sleep 59 0 0:00:00 0.0% inetd/4 13 root 20M 19M sleep 59 0 0:00:37 0.0% svc.configd/24 Total: 49 processes, 669 lwps, load averages: 0.05, 0.05, 0.04 # 490 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Appendix D External Interface Specifications This appendix describes the specifications of the external interface connectors and the switch for the XSCF provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. The external interface connectors provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S are as follows. ■ Serial Port ■ USB Port ■ SAS Port The external interface connectors provided on the crossbar box are as follows. Serial Port ■ ■ USB Port The switch for the XSCF that is provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S will be as follows: ■ RESET Switch D.1 Serial Port Table D-1 lists the specifications of the serial ports of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. 491 Table D-1 Serial port Pin arrangement D.1.1 Signal name Input/Output Description 1 RTS Output Transmission request 2 DTR Output Data terminal ready 3 TXD Output Transmitted data 4 GND --- Ground 5 GND --- Ground 6 RXD Input Received data 7 DSR Input Data set ready 8 CTS Input Transmission possible Wire connection chart for serial cable Figure D-1 D.2 Pin number Wire connection chart of serial cable USB Port Table D-2 lists the specifications of the USB port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. 492 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Table D-2 USB port Pin arrangement D.3 Pin number Signal name Input/Output Description 1 VBUS Output Power supply 2 -DATA Input/ Output Data 3 +DATA Input/ Output Data 4 GND --- Ground SAS Port The SAS port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is used to connect external devices with an SAS interface, such as a tape drive. The chassis has one SAS port on the rear. Consult a service engineer for more information about compatible devices. D.4 RESET Switch The RESET switch of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is an emergency switch to restart the XSCF. For how to use the RESET switch, see "17.2 Precautions concerning Using the RESET Switch" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide. Figure D-2 indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4 while Figure D-3 indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4S. The RESET switch (A in the figure) is located on the rear of the chassis. Appendix D External Interface Specifications 493 Figure D-2 RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4) A Figure D-3 RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4S) A 494 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ・ December 2013 Index C L cable kit, 425 cable, types of, 29 component list, 463 component specifications, 467 components, names and locations of, 11 CPU memory unit, 83 crossbar backplane unit, 343 crossbar cable (electrical), 379 crossbar cable (optical), 389 crossbar unit, 179, 297 labels, 2 LED indications, 23 D dedicated power distribution unit, 453 E emergency power off, 8 entire system, starting, 74 entire system, stopping, 62 external interface, 491 M maintenance, preparing for, 41 maintenance, types of, 44 memory, 159 O operation panel, 281, 367 Oracle Solaris, 477 P PCI Express card, 239 physical partition, powering off, 60 physical partition, powering on, 73 power supply unit, 191, 317 PSU backplane unit, 265 S F system, restoring, 69 failure, identifying, 34 fan backplane, 357 fan unit, 205, 327 T I W internal disk, 219 warning labels, 2 tags, 2 495 X XSCF BB control cable, 401 XSCF DUAL control cable, 413 XSCF interface unit, 337 XSCF unit, 307 496 Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Create Date : 2013:12:18 10:06:01+09:00 Modify Date : 2013:12:19 17:25:40+09:00 Metadata Date : 2013:12:19 17:25:40+09:00 Trapped : False Producer : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.3 (Windows) GTS PDFX Conformance : PDF/X-1a:2001 GTS PDFX Version : PDF/X-1:2001 Format : application/pdf Title : Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual Description : C120-E682-06EN Creator : FUJITSU LIMITED Document ID : uuid:393fe2f6-1cff-43ce-9d68-c5fbd8aabc2d Instance ID : uuid:93564aa2-1886-452e-b993-a88aadffd321 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 520 Author : FUJITSU LIMITED Subject : C120-E682-06ENEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools